Lexmark Printer X940E User Manual
X940e, X945e  
User's Guide  
April 2007  
www.lexmark.com  
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
© 2007 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
740 West New Circle Road  
Lexington, Kentucky 40550  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety information.......................................................................................................15  
Learning about the printer..........................................................................................17  
Printer configurations.........................................................................................................................17  
Basic functions of the scanner...........................................................................................................17  
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass.......................................................................................18  
Understanding the control panel.......................................................................................................19  
Understanding the home screen.......................................................................................................20  
Using the touch-screen buttons.........................................................................................................22  
Installing options.........................................................................................................27  
Installing internal options...................................................................................................................27  
Available options ........................................................................................................................................27  
Accessing the system board to install internal options...............................................................................27  
Installing a memory card ............................................................................................................................28  
Installing a flash memory or firmware card.................................................................................................29  
Installing an internal print server or port interface card ..............................................................................30  
Reinstalling the system board ....................................................................................................................31  
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................32  
Loading paper and specialty media...........................................................................34  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................34  
Loading the 520-sheet trays..............................................................................................................34  
Loading the 520-sheet trays.......................................................................................................................34  
Using A5 or statement paper sizes.............................................................................................................36  
Loading the 867- and 1133-sheet trays.............................................................................................37  
Using the multipurpose feeder...........................................................................................................38  
Configuring Universal paper settings.................................................................................................41  
Linking and unlinking trays................................................................................................................41  
Linking trays ...............................................................................................................................................41  
Unlinking trays............................................................................................................................................41  
Changing a Custom Type <x> name..........................................................................................................42  
Assigning a custom paper type name ........................................................................................................42  
Paper and specialty media guide...............................................................................43  
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................43  
Paper characteristics..................................................................................................................................43  
Unacceptable paper ...................................................................................................................................44  
Selecting paper...........................................................................................................................................44  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead..................................................................................................44  
Using recycled paper..................................................................................................................................44  
Using letterhead................................................................................................................................45  
Using transparencies.........................................................................................................................46  
Using envelopes................................................................................................................................47  
Using labels.......................................................................................................................................47  
Using card stock................................................................................................................................48  
Storing paper.....................................................................................................................................48  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.......................................................................................48  
Paper sizes supported by the printer..........................................................................................................49  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer .....................................................................................50  
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher....................................................................................50  
Supported finishing features.......................................................................................................................51  
Copying.........................................................................................................................55  
Making copies....................................................................................................................................55  
Making a quick copy...................................................................................................................................55  
Copying using the ADF...............................................................................................................................55  
Copying using the scanner glass (flatbed) .................................................................................................56  
Copying photos..................................................................................................................................56  
Copying on specialty media...............................................................................................................56  
Making transparencies ...............................................................................................................................56  
Copying to letterhead .................................................................................................................................56  
Customizing copy settings.................................................................................................................57  
Copying from one size to another...............................................................................................................57  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ........................................................................................57  
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes ...............................................................................58  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing).........................................................................................58  
Reducing or enlarging copies.....................................................................................................................59  
Adjusting copy quality.................................................................................................................................59  
Collating copies ..........................................................................................................................................60  
Placing separator sheets between copies..................................................................................................60  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet...............................................................................................60  
Creating a custom job (job build)................................................................................................................61  
Job interrupt.......................................................................................................................................62  
Placing information on copies............................................................................................................62  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page.....................................................................................62  
Placing an overlay message on each page................................................................................................63  
Canceling a copy job.........................................................................................................................63  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF.............................................................................63  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass..........................................................63  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed ............................................................................63  
Understanding the copy screens and options...................................................................................63  
Copy from...................................................................................................................................................63  
Copy to .......................................................................................................................................................64  
Scale...........................................................................................................................................................64  
Darkness ....................................................................................................................................................64  
Color...........................................................................................................................................................64  
Photo ..........................................................................................................................................................64  
Sides (Duplex)............................................................................................................................................64  
Collate ........................................................................................................................................................64  
Options .......................................................................................................................................................64  
Improving copy quality.......................................................................................................................66  
E-mailing.......................................................................................................................67  
Getting ready to e-mail......................................................................................................................67  
Setting up the e-mail function.....................................................................................................................67  
Setting up the address book.......................................................................................................................67  
Creating an e-mail shortcut...............................................................................................................68  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ..................................................................68  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen ...................................................................................68  
E-mailing a document........................................................................................................................68  
Sending an e-mail using the keypad ..........................................................................................................68  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number...............................................................................................69  
Sending an e-mail using the address book ................................................................................................69  
E-mailing color documents................................................................................................................69  
Using profiles.....................................................................................................................................70  
Creating an e-mail profile ...........................................................................................................................70  
E-mailing to a profile...................................................................................................................................70  
Customizing e-mail settings...............................................................................................................70  
Adding e-mail subject and message information........................................................................................70  
Changing the output file type......................................................................................................................71  
Canceling an e-mail...........................................................................................................................71  
Understanding e-mail options............................................................................................................71  
Original Size ...............................................................................................................................................71  
Sides (Duplex)............................................................................................................................................71  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Orientation..................................................................................................................................................72  
Binding........................................................................................................................................................72  
E-mail Subject ............................................................................................................................................72  
E-mail Message..........................................................................................................................................72  
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................72  
Send As......................................................................................................................................................72  
Content.......................................................................................................................................................72  
Advanced Options ......................................................................................................................................72  
Faxing...........................................................................................................................74  
Getting the printer ready to fax..........................................................................................................74  
Choosing a fax connection .........................................................................................................................74  
Using an RJ11 adapter...............................................................................................................................75  
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany...........................................................................78  
Connecting to a telephone..........................................................................................................................79  
Connecting to an answering machine ........................................................................................................80  
Connecting to a computer with a modem...................................................................................................81  
Setting the outgoing fax name and number................................................................................................83  
Setting the date and time............................................................................................................................83  
Turning daylight saving time on or off.........................................................................................................83  
Sending a fax.....................................................................................................................................84  
Sending a fax using the control panel ........................................................................................................84  
Sending a fax using the computer..............................................................................................................84  
Creating shortcuts.............................................................................................................................84  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.......................................................84  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen........................................................................85  
Using shortcuts and the address book..............................................................................................85  
Using fax destination shortcuts...................................................................................................................85  
Using the address book..............................................................................................................................86  
Customizing fax settings....................................................................................................................86  
Changing the fax resolution........................................................................................................................86  
Making a fax lighter or darker.....................................................................................................................86  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time .............................................................................................................87  
Viewing a fax log ........................................................................................................................................87  
Canceling an outgoing fax.................................................................................................................87  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning.................................................................87  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory...........................................88  
Understanding fax options.................................................................................................................88  
Original Size ...............................................................................................................................................88  
Content.......................................................................................................................................................88  
Sides (Duplex)............................................................................................................................................88  
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................88  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Darkness ....................................................................................................................................................88  
Advanced Options ......................................................................................................................................89  
Improving fax quality..........................................................................................................................89  
Holding and forwarding faxes............................................................................................................89  
Holding faxes..............................................................................................................................................89  
Forwarding a fax.........................................................................................................................................90  
Scanning to an FTP address.......................................................................................91  
Scanning to an FTP address.............................................................................................................91  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad..........................................................................................91  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number ..............................................................................92  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book................................................................................92  
Creating shortcuts.............................................................................................................................92  
Creating an FTP destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...................................................92  
Creating an FTP destination shortcut using the touch screen....................................................................93  
Understanding FTP options...............................................................................................................93  
Original Size ...............................................................................................................................................93  
Sides (Duplex)............................................................................................................................................93  
Binding........................................................................................................................................................93  
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................93  
Send As......................................................................................................................................................93  
Content.......................................................................................................................................................93  
Advanced Options ......................................................................................................................................94  
Improving FTP quality........................................................................................................................94  
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device............................................95  
Scanning to a computer.....................................................................................................................95  
Scanning to a USB flash memory device..........................................................................................96  
Understanding scan to computer options..........................................................................................96  
Quick Setup................................................................................................................................................96  
Format Type ...............................................................................................................................................96  
Compression ..............................................................................................................................................97  
Default Content...........................................................................................................................................97  
Color...........................................................................................................................................................97  
Original Size ...............................................................................................................................................97  
Orientation..................................................................................................................................................97  
Sides (Duplex)............................................................................................................................................97  
Darkness ....................................................................................................................................................97  
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................97  
Advanced Imaging......................................................................................................................................97  
Improving scan quality.......................................................................................................................98  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing.........................................................................................................................99  
Installing printer software...................................................................................................................99  
Printing a document...........................................................................................................................99  
Printing a document from Windows............................................................................................................99  
Printing a document from a Macintosh computer.......................................................................................99  
Printing confidential and other held jobs...........................................................................................99  
Holding jobs in the printer...........................................................................................................................99  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows...........................................................................100  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer......................................................100  
Printing from a USB flash memory device.......................................................................................101  
Printing information pages...............................................................................................................103  
Printing a menu settings page..................................................................................................................103  
Printing a network setup page..................................................................................................................103  
Printing a directory list ..............................................................................................................................103  
Printing the print quality test pages ..........................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................104  
Canceling a print job from the control panel.............................................................................................104  
Canceling a print job from the Windows taskbar ......................................................................................104  
Canceling a print job from the Windows desktop .....................................................................................104  
Canceling a print job from Mac OS 9........................................................................................................104  
Canceling a print job from Mac OS X .......................................................................................................104  
Printing in black and white...............................................................................................................105  
Using Max Speed and Max Yield....................................................................................................105  
Clearing jams.............................................................................................................106  
Avoiding jams..................................................................................................................................106  
Understanding jam numbers and locations.....................................................................................106  
200–203 paper jams........................................................................................................................108  
230–231 paper jams........................................................................................................................108  
241 paper jam..................................................................................................................................111  
242–244 paper jams........................................................................................................................112  
250 paper jam..................................................................................................................................114  
280–282 paper jams........................................................................................................................115  
283–284 and 287–288 paper jams..................................................................................................116  
284–286 paper jams........................................................................................................................118  
289 staple jam.................................................................................................................................119  
290–295 paper jams........................................................................................................................122  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus...................................................................................124  
Menus list........................................................................................................................................124  
Supplies menu.................................................................................................................................125  
Paper menu.....................................................................................................................................126  
Default Source menu................................................................................................................................126  
Paper Size/Type menu.............................................................................................................................126  
Configure MP menu..................................................................................................................................128  
Substitute Size menu................................................................................................................................129  
Paper Texture menu.................................................................................................................................129  
Paper Loading menu ................................................................................................................................130  
Custom Types menu ................................................................................................................................131  
Custom Names menu...............................................................................................................................131  
Custom Bin Names menu.........................................................................................................................132  
Universal Setup menu ..............................................................................................................................132  
Bin Setup menu........................................................................................................................................133  
Reports menu..................................................................................................................................134  
Reports menu...........................................................................................................................................134  
Settings menu..................................................................................................................................136  
General Settings menu.............................................................................................................................136  
Copy Settings menu .................................................................................................................................141  
Fax Settings menu....................................................................................................................................143  
E-mail Settings menu ...............................................................................................................................151  
E-mail Server Setup menu .......................................................................................................................154  
FTP Settings menu...................................................................................................................................155  
Scan to USB Settings...............................................................................................................................158  
Print Settings ............................................................................................................................................161  
Security menu...........................................................................................................................................175  
Set Date and Time....................................................................................................................................179  
Network/Ports menu........................................................................................................................180  
TCP/IP menu............................................................................................................................................180  
IPv6 menu ................................................................................................................................................182  
E-mail Server Setup menu .......................................................................................................................183  
Active NIC menu.......................................................................................................................................184  
Standard Network menu...........................................................................................................................184  
Standard USB menu.................................................................................................................................186  
NetWare menu .........................................................................................................................................187  
AppleTalk menu........................................................................................................................................188  
LexLink menu ...........................................................................................................................................188  
Help menu.......................................................................................................................................188  
Understanding printer messages.............................................................................190  
List of status and error messages...................................................................................................190  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer..............................................................................................203  
Storing supplies...............................................................................................................................203  
Checking the status of supplies.......................................................................................................203  
Checking the status of supplies from the control panel............................................................................203  
Printing a menu settings page..................................................................................................................203  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer.......................................................................203  
Conserving supplies........................................................................................................................204  
Ordering supplies............................................................................................................................204  
Ordering toner cartridges..........................................................................................................................204  
Ordering photoconductors........................................................................................................................204  
Ordering staple cartridges ........................................................................................................................204  
Ordering a waste toner box ......................................................................................................................205  
Replacing supplies..........................................................................................................................205  
Replacing the waste toner box .................................................................................................................205  
Cleaning the printhead lenses..................................................................................................................210  
Replacing a photoconductor.....................................................................................................................214  
Replacing a toner cartridge ......................................................................................................................217  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer..................................................................................................219  
Cleaning the scanner glass.............................................................................................................220  
Recycling Lexmark products...........................................................................................................220  
Moving the printer............................................................................................................................220  
Before moving the printer .........................................................................................................................220  
Moving the printer and options to another location within the office.........................................................221  
Disassembling the printer from the scanner shelf prior to the move ........................................................221  
Setting the printer up in a new location ....................................................................................................223  
Shipping the printer ..................................................................................................................................224  
Administrative support..............................................................................................225  
Adjusting the brightness of the display............................................................................................225  
Disabling control panel menus........................................................................................................225  
Adjusting Power Saver....................................................................................................................225  
Restoring the factory default settings..............................................................................................226  
Encrypting the printer hard disk.......................................................................................................226  
Locking the control panel menus using the Embedded Web Server...............................................227  
Locking the entire printer.................................................................................................................227  
Modifying confidential print settings................................................................................................227  
Supporting IPSec.............................................................................................................................228  
Supporting SNMPv3........................................................................................................................228  
Using 802.1x authentication............................................................................................................228  
Creating an administrative password..............................................................................................229  
Using Secure mode.........................................................................................................................229  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting.........................................................................................................231  
Checking an unresponsive printer...................................................................................................231  
Door A will not shut properly............................................................................................................231  
Solving printing problems................................................................................................................232  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print ........................................................................................................232  
Control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds ........................................................................232  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears....................................................................................232  
Jobs do not print.......................................................................................................................................232  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print............................................................................................233  
Job takes longer than expected to print....................................................................................................233  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper..............................................................................234  
Incorrect characters print..........................................................................................................................234  
Tray linking does not work........................................................................................................................234  
Large jobs do not collate ..........................................................................................................................234  
Unexpected page breaks occur................................................................................................................234  
Solving copy problems....................................................................................................................235  
Copier does not respond ..........................................................................................................................235  
Scanner unit does not close .....................................................................................................................235  
Poor copy quality......................................................................................................................................235  
Partial document or photo copies.............................................................................................................236  
Solving scanner problems...............................................................................................................237  
Checking an unresponsive scanner .........................................................................................................237  
Scan was not successful ..........................................................................................................................237  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer ....................................................................................237  
Poor scanned image quality .....................................................................................................................237  
Partial document or photo scans..............................................................................................................238  
Cannot scan from a computer ..................................................................................................................238  
Solving fax problems.......................................................................................................................238  
Caller ID is not shown...............................................................................................................................238  
Cannot send or receive a fax....................................................................................................................238  
Can send but not receive faxes................................................................................................................240  
Can receive but not send faxes................................................................................................................240  
Received fax has poor print quality ..........................................................................................................240  
Blocking junk faxes...................................................................................................................................241  
Solving option problems..................................................................................................................241  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed...................................................................241  
Drawers ....................................................................................................................................................242  
Finisher.....................................................................................................................................................242  
Flash memory card...................................................................................................................................242  
Hard disk with adapter..............................................................................................................................242  
Internal print server...................................................................................................................................243  
Memory card.............................................................................................................................................243  
USB/parallel interface card.......................................................................................................................243  
Solving paper feed problems...........................................................................................................243  
Paper frequently jams...............................................................................................................................243  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ....................................................................................243  
Print jobs are not routed to the booklet-maker bin....................................................................................243  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam......................................................................244  
Solving print quality problems..........................................................................................................245  
Isolating print quality problems.................................................................................................................245  
Blank pages..............................................................................................................................................245  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges................................................................................................246  
Clipped images.........................................................................................................................................246  
Dark lines..................................................................................................................................................246  
Gray background......................................................................................................................................246  
Incorrect margins......................................................................................................................................247  
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line ...........................................................................247  
Paper curl .................................................................................................................................................248  
Print irregularities......................................................................................................................................248  
Repeating defects.....................................................................................................................................249  
Skewed print.............................................................................................................................................249  
Print is too light.........................................................................................................................................249  
Print is too dark.........................................................................................................................................250  
Solid color pages......................................................................................................................................250  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page ..........................................................................251  
Toner rubs off ...........................................................................................................................................251  
Toner specks............................................................................................................................................251  
Transparency print quality is poor ............................................................................................................252  
Uneven print density.................................................................................................................................252  
Solving color quality problems.........................................................................................................252  
FAQ about color printing...........................................................................................................................252  
Contacting Customer Support.........................................................................................................255  
Notices........................................................................................................................256  
Edition notice...................................................................................................................................256  
Industry Canada notices..................................................................................................................257  
Power consumption.........................................................................................................................263  
Index............................................................................................................................266  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
Connect the power supply cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.  
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.  
CAUTION: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical  
or cabling connections, such as the power supply cord or telephone, during a lightning storm.  
Use only a 26 AWG or larger telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched  
telephone network.  
CAUTION: The printer weighs 91.2 kg (201 lbs); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely into place. The  
scanner weighs 25 kg (55 lb); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely while it is on its scanner shelf.  
CAUTION: The printer weighs 91.2 kg (201 lbs); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely.  
CAUTION: If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer, turn the printer off  
and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the  
printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer.  
CAUTION: Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing an internal option.  
If you have any other devices attached to the printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the  
printer.  
CAUTION: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are  
properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.  
CAUTION: If you are installing a memory card after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and unplug the  
power cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific Lexmark  
components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. Lexmark is not responsible for the use  
of other replacement parts.  
This product uses a laser.  
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may  
result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release  
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting  
print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.  
This symbol indicates the presence of a hot surface or component.  
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
This product uses a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). Monthly testing of the GFCI is recommended.  
CAUTION: If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer, turn the printer off  
and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the  
printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer.  
CAUTION: Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have  
any other devices attached to the printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
CAUTION: If you are installing a memory card after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and unplug the  
power cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
CAUTION: If installing a flash memory or firmware card after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
CAUTION: If installing a printer hard disk after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and unplug the power  
cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
CAUTION: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the  
surface to cool before touching.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Learning about the printer  
Printer configurations  
Basic models  
1
2
3
4
5
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Control panel  
Standard exit bin  
Standard 520-sheet tray (Tray 1)  
Cabinet or high capacity feeder.  
The high capacity feeder consists of:  
520-sheet tray (Tray 2)  
2000-sheet dual input  
• 6—867-sheet tray (Tray 3)  
• 7—1133-sheet tray (Tray 4)  
Multipurpose feeder  
8
Basic functions of the scanner  
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:  
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the control panel to perform specific copy jobs.  
• Send a fax using the control panel.  
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.  
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a USB flash memory device, or an FTP  
destination.  
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.  
Using the ADF  
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages including duplex pages. When using the ADF:  
• Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.  
• Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.  
• Scan sizes from 114.0 x 139.4 mm (4.5 x 5.5 in.) to 297.18 x 431.8 mm (11.7 x 17 in.).  
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).  
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).  
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Using the scanner glass  
The scanner glass (flatbed) can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:  
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 in.) thick.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding the control panel  
1
2
3
ABC  
DEF  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
4
5
6
8
7
Control panel item  
Description  
Display  
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.  
1
2
Indicator light  
Indicates the printer status:  
• Off—The power is off.  
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.  
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.  
• Solid red—Operator intervention is needed.  
3
Keypad  
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.  
Dial Pause  
4
5
• Press  
to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To:  
field, a Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).  
• From the home screen, press  
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of  
the Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing  
to redial a fax number.  
causes an error beep.  
Home  
Press to return home.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control panel item  
Description  
Start  
6
• Press  
to initiate the current job indicated on the display.  
to start a copy job with the default settings.  
• From the home screen, press  
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.  
Stop  
Back  
Stops all printer activity  
7
8
A list of options is offered once Stoppedappears on the display.  
In the Copy menu, press  
to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count.  
The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing  
times.  
numerous  
In the Fax Destination List, press  
manually. You can also press  
to delete the right-most digit of a number entered  
to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is  
deleted, another press of  
In the E-mail Destination List, press  
the character is in a shortcut, the shortcut is deleted.  
causes the cursor to move up one line.  
to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If  
Understanding the home screen  
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows the following basic screen which  
is referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or  
scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.  
Display item  
Description  
Copy  
Access the Copy menus.  
1
Note: If the home screen is shown, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing  
a number on the keypad.  
2
3
E-mail  
Menus  
Access the E-mail menus.  
Access the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready  
state.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display item  
Description  
Status message bar  
4
• Shows the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.  
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.  
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what the user should do so  
the printer can continue processing, such as Close dooror Insert print  
cartridge.  
Status/Supplies  
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring  
intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the  
message, including how to clear it.  
5
Tips  
FTP  
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display  
touch screens.  
6
7
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus.  
Note: This function must be set up by your system support person. Once it is set up,  
it appears as a display item.  
8
Fax  
Access the Fax menus.  
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Release Held Faxes  
If this button is shown, there are held faxes with a  
scheduled hold time previously set. To access the  
list of held faxes, touch this button.  
Search Held Jobs  
Searches on any of the following items and returns  
search results:  
• User names for held or confidential print jobs  
• Job names for held jobs, excluding  
confidential print jobs  
• Profile names  
• Bookmark container or job names  
• USB container or job names for supported  
extensions only  
Held Jobs  
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs  
Lock Device  
This button appears on the screen when the printer  
is unlocked and Device Lockout Personal  
Identification Number (PIN) is not empty.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen.  
Entering the correct PIN locks the control panel  
(touch screen and hard buttons).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Unlock Device  
This button appears on the screen when the printer  
is locked. The control panel buttons and shortcuts  
cannot be used while it appears.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen.  
Entering the correct PIN unlocks the control panel  
(touch screen and hard buttons).  
Cancel Jobs  
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs  
screen shows three headings: Print, Fax, and  
Network.  
The following items are available under the Print,  
Fax, and Network headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax profile  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column  
under it. Each column can show only three jobs per  
screen. The job appears as a button which you can  
touch to access information about the job. If more  
than three jobs exist in a column, then the down  
arrow appears at the bottom of the column. Each  
touch of the down arrow accesses one job in the  
list. When more than three jobs exist, once the  
fourth job in the list is reached, then an up arrow  
appears at the top of the column.  
Using the touch-screen buttons  
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample screen one  
Button  
Button name  
Scroll down  
Function  
Opens a drop-down list  
Left scroll decrease button Scrolls to another value in decreasing order  
Right scroll increase button Scrolls to another value in increasing order  
Left arrow button  
Right arrow button  
Scan the ADF  
Scrolls left  
Scrolls right  
Scans using the ADF  
Scan the flatbed  
Submit  
Scans using the scanner glass  
Saves a value as the new user default setting  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Back  
When the button is shaped like this, no other navigation is possible  
from this screen except to go back.  
Back  
When the button is shaped like this, both forward and backward  
navigation is possible from this screen.  
Sample screen two  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Down arrow  
Moves down to the next screen  
Up arrow  
Moves up to the next screen  
Unselected radio button This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it  
is unselected.  
Selected radio button  
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is  
selected.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Cancel Jobs  
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three  
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.  
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network  
headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax profile  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it. Each  
column can show only three jobs per screen. The job appears as a  
button which you can touch to access information about the job. If  
more than three jobs exist in a column, then the down arrow appears  
at the bottom of the column. Each touch of the down arrow accesses  
one job in the list. When more than three jobs exist, once the fourth  
job in the list is reached, then an up arrow appears at the top of the  
column.  
Continue  
Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or  
after clearing a paper jam.  
Other touch-screen buttons  
Button  
Button name  
Function  
Cancel  
• Cancels an action or a selection  
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the  
previous screen  
Select  
Done  
Selects a menu or menu item  
Specifies that a job is finished  
For example, when scanning an original document,  
touch this button to indicate the last page has  
scanned. The job then begins printing.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Feature  
Feature name  
Description  
MenusŒ SettingsŒ  
Copy SettingsŒ  
Number of Copies  
Menu trail line  
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu  
screen. This feature acts as a trail, showing the path  
taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact  
location within the menus.  
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that  
menu or menu item.  
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is  
the current screen. If this feature is used on the  
Number of Copies screen before the Number of  
Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not  
saved, and it does not become the user default  
setting.  
Attendance message alert  
If an attendance message occurs which closes a  
function, such as copy or fax, then a solid red  
exclamation point appears over the function button  
on the home screen. This indicates that an  
attendance message exists.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing options  
Installing internal options  
CAUTION: If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer, turn the printer off  
and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the  
printer, turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going to the printer.  
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this  
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.  
Available options  
Memory cards  
• Printer memory  
• Flash memory  
• Fonts  
Firmware cards  
• Bar Code and Forms  
• IPDS and SCS/TNe  
• PrintCryptionTM  
• PRESCRIBE  
Other internal options  
• RS-232 serial interface card  
• Parallel 1284-B interface card  
• MarkNetTM N8000 Series Internal Print Servers  
Accessing the system board to install internal options  
CAUTION: Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing an internal option.  
If you have any other devices attached to the printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the  
printer.  
Note: This operation requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.  
1 Remove the cover and system board.  
a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise, and then remove them.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Gently pull the cover and system board away from the printer, and then remove it.  
2 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector.  
Warning: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
4
3
1
2
Firmware and flash memory card connectors  
Memory card connector  
1
2
3
4
Internal print server connector  
Hard disk  
Installing a memory card  
CAUTION: If you are installing a memory card after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and unplug the  
power cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
Warning: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal  
on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory  
card:  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Open the memory card connector latches.  
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.  
1
2
Notches  
Ridges  
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.  
6 Reinstall the system board.  
Installing a flash memory or firmware card  
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be  
installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.  
CAUTION: If you are installing a memory card after setting up the printer, turn the printer off, and unplug the  
power cord from the wall outlet before continuing.  
Warning: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal  
on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
Plastic pins  
Metal pins  
4 Push the card firmly into place.  
Notes:  
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.  
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.  
5 Reinstall the system board.  
Installing an internal print server or port interface card  
CAUTION: Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing an internal option.  
If you have any other devices attached to the printer, turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the  
printer.  
Warning: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal  
on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
Note: A #2 Phillips screwdriver is needed to install an internal print server or port interface card.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
An internal print server allows connection from the printer to the local area network (LAN). An optional port interface  
card expands the ways the printer can connect to a computer or external print server.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the internal print server or port interface card.  
3 Remove the metal plate on the system board tray that covers the connector slot, and save the metal plate.  
4 Align the connector on the internal print server or port interface card with the connector on the system board.  
Note: The cable connectors on the side of the optional card must fit through the opening in the faceplate.  
5 Push the internal print server or port interface card firmly into the card connector on the system board.  
6 Insert a screw into the hole on the right side of the connector slot. Gently tighten the screw to secure the card  
to the system board tray.  
7 Reinstall the system board.  
Reinstalling the system board  
Warning: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal  
on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: This operation requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.  
1 Gently insert the system board into the printer.  
2 Replace the cover screws, and then turn them clockwise.  
3 Tighten the screws firmly.  
Attaching cables  
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable. A USB port requires a USB cable. Be sure  
to match the USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer. Match the appropriate Ethernet cable to  
the Ethernet port.  
Connect the two scanner cables to the scanner connectors on the back of the printer.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
3
4
USB port  
Ethernet port  
Scanner connector  
Scanner connector  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
This section explains how to load the 520-, 850-, and 1150-sheet trays, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes  
information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type  
The Paper Size setting is determined by the position of the paper guides in the tray for all trays except the  
multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually. The factory default  
Paper Type setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain  
paper.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the control panel, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the tray number, or touch MP Feeder Size.  
6 Touch repeatedly until the desired size appears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
Loading the 520-sheet trays  
Short-edge printing (for A4- and letter-size paper) and specifying auto-size sensing (for A5- and statement-size  
paper) are available only for the 520-sheet trays.  
Loading the 520-sheet trays  
The printer has a standard 520-sheet tray (Tray 1), and it may have one or more optional 520-sheet trays. All  
520-sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types. Paper may be loaded in the trays in either the long-edge  
or short-edge orientation.  
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the tray out.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 Squeeze the width guide tabs together as shown, and move the width guide to the correct position for the paper  
size being loaded.  
3 Squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size  
being loaded.  
Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.  
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten  
the edges on a level surface.  
5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup. Load the paper in either the long-edge or  
short-edge orientation as shown below:  
Notes:  
• Load sizes larger than A4 in the short-edge orientation.  
• Paper must be loaded in the short-edge orientation to create booklets if the optional booklet finisher is  
installed.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Long-edge orientation  
Short-edge orientation  
6 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper.  
7 Align the tray, and insert it.  
8 If a different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray, change the Paper Type setting  
for the tray from the control panel.  
Using A5 or statement paper sizes  
The paper trays cannot distinguish between A5- (148 x 210 mm) and statement-size (140 x 216 mm) paper when  
both sizes are loaded in the paper trays. From the Size Sensing menu, specify which size you want the printer to  
detect. Load either A5- or statement-size paper in the paper trays, but not both.  
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not use auto-size sensing and can support both A5- and statement-size print  
jobs. The Size Sensing setting does not affect the multipurpose feeder settings.  
1 Load either A5- or statement-size paper in a paper tray.  
2 Turn the printer off.  
3 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Size Sensingappears.  
6 Touch Size Sensing.  
7 Touch  
repeatedly until Statement/A5appears.  
repeatedly until the paper size you want appears.  
8 Touch  
9 Touch Submit.  
10 Touch Exit Config Menu.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading the 867- and 1133-sheet trays  
Although the 867-sheet tray and the 1133-sheet tray are different in appearance, they support the same paper sizes  
and types and require the same process for loading paper. Use these instructions to load paper in either tray:  
1 Grasp the handle, and open the tray.  
2 Squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size  
being loaded.  
3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten  
the edges on a level surface.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.  
5 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper.  
6 Insert the tray into the printer.  
7 If a different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray, change the Paper Type setting  
for the tray from the control panel.  
Using the multipurpose feeder  
1
2
Paper guides  
Size indicators  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Stack height limiter  
1 Pull the multipurpose feeder tray down.  
2 Grasp the extension, and gently pull it out until it is fully extended.  
3 Prepare the paper for loading.  
• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Note: Avoid touching the print side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.  
• Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level  
surface.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Load the paper, and then adjust the paper guides so that they lightly touch the edges of the paper stack.  
• Load letter, A4, and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the long edge of the  
paper entering the printer first.  
• Load A3, A5, B4, folio, legal, and statement paper with the recommended print side facedown and the short  
edge of the paper entering the printer first.  
Notes:  
– Adjust the additional paper guide to accommodate SRA3 and 12 x 19 paper sizes.  
– Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.  
• Load envelopes with the flap side up.  
Warning: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives.  
These envelopes may severely damage the printer.  
Note: Load only one size and type of paper at a time.  
5 Make sure the paper is as far into the multipurpose feeder as it will go with very gentle pushing. Paper should  
lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or  
wrinkled.  
6 From the control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Universal paper settings  
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer  
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper  
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:  
• Units of measure (inches or millimeters)  
• Portrait Height and Portrait Width  
• Feed Direction  
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 100 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in.); the largest is 305 x 483 mm  
(11.7 x 19 in.).  
Set paper size to universal  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Size.  
6 Touch repeatedly until Universalappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
Linking and unlinking trays  
Linking trays  
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next  
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically  
linked. The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray  
except the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the  
Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The Paper Type  
menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Unlinking trays  
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.  
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:  
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)  
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by  
linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own  
custom name.  
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)  
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the  
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.  
Warning: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray.  
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be properly processed if  
an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing a Custom Type <x> name  
You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM to define a name other than Custom Type <x> for each  
of the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display the new  
name instead of Custom Type <x>.  
To change a Custom Type <x> name from the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the network printer (for example,192.264.263.17).  
3 Press Enter.  
4 From the navigation panel of the initial page, click Configuration.  
5 Click Paper Menu.  
6 Click Custom Name.  
7 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.  
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size/Type  
menus.  
8 Click Submit.  
Submitting Selectionappears.  
9 Click Custom Types.  
Custom Typesappears, followed by your custom name.  
10 Select a Paper Type setting from the picklist next to your custom name.  
11 Click Submit.  
Submitting Selectionappears.  
Assigning a custom paper type name  
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the control panel, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type.  
6 Touch  
repeatedly until Custom Type <x>or another custom name appears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper and specialty media guide  
Paper guidelines  
Paper characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating  
new paper stock.  
Weight  
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter  
than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb)  
or heavier paper.  
Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m2–170 g/m2 (17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur  
after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in  
hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause  
feeding problems.  
Smoothness  
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too  
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;  
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.  
Moisture content  
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.  
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that  
can degrade its performance.  
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to  
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different  
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.  
Grain direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of  
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.  
For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2,  
grain short is recommended.  
Fiber content  
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the  
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper  
containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unacceptable paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,  
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper  
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 2.3 mm  
( 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms  
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.  
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers  
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)  
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
• Multiple-part forms or documents  
Selecting paper  
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.  
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:  
• Always use new, undamaged paper.  
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on  
the paper package.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.  
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead  
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:  
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 weight paper.  
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand  
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected  
by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.  
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.  
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
Using recycled paper  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically  
for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study  
demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However,  
no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test  
paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has  
found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property  
guidelines apply to recycled paper.  
• Low moisture content (4–5%)  
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units)  
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)  
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed  
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 gm2/16 lb bond) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils/0.1 mm), and paper that  
is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for  
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper  
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause  
paper feeding problems.  
Using letterhead  
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser  
printers.  
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following sections to determine which direction  
to load the letterhead in each paper source:  
Loading letterhead in the multipurpose feeder  
Note: Place the letterhead facedown in the multipurpose feeder with the long edge of the paper entering the printer  
first.  
Loading letterhead in the 520-sheet trays  
Long-edge orientation  
Without finisher  
With finisher installed  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Short-edge orientation  
Without finisher  
With finisher installed  
Loading letterhead in the 867-sheet tray  
Without finisher  
With finisher installed  
Loading letterhead in the 1133-sheet tray  
Without finisher  
With finisher installed  
Using transparencies  
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on transparencies:  
• From MarkVision Professional, Print Properties, or the control panel, set the Paper Type to Transparency.  
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray or the multipurpose feeder.  
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure  
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting,  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Use transparencies that are 0.12–0.14 mm (4.8–5.4 mil) in thickness or 161–179 g/m2 in weight. Print quality  
and durability depend on the transparencies used.  
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.  
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
• We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter-size transparencies.  
Using envelopes  
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on envelopes:  
• From the control panel, set the Paper Source based on the source in use. From MarkVision Professional, Print  
Properties, or the control panel, set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.  
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the  
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)  
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g/  
m2 (24 lb bond) weight.  
• Use only new envelopes.  
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:  
– Have excessive curl or twist  
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
– Have an interlocking design  
– Have postage stamps attached  
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
– Have bent corners  
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.  
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.  
Using labels  
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available  
on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.  
When printing on labels:  
• From MarkVision Professional, Print Properties, or the control panel, set the Paper Type to Labels.  
• Use only letter, A4, or legal-size label sheets.  
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that label  
adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) and  
pressure up to 25 psi without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes. Do not use  
vinyl labels.  
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets  
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.  
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.  
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.  
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)  
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.  
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,  
and use a non-oozing adhesive.  
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.  
Using card stock  
Card stock is heavy, single-ply print media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,  
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before  
buying large quantities.  
When printing on card stock:  
• From MarkVision Professional, or the control panel:  
1 Set the Paper Type to Card Stock.  
2 Select a Card Stock Texture setting.  
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or  
other paper handling problems.  
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°  
F) without releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting  
introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.  
• Use grain long card stock when possible.  
Storing paper  
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:  
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label  
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity  
between 40 and 60%.  
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.  
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.  
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights  
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.  
Note: For an unlisted paper size, configure a Universal Paper Size.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide.  
Paper sizes supported by the printer  
Paper size  
Dimensions  
520-sheet  
trays  
High capacity Multipurpose  
Duplex unit  
feeder  
feeder  
(standard or  
optional)  
297 x 420 mm  
(11.7 x 16.5 in.)  
A3  
X
210 x 297 mm  
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)  
A4  
A51  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
Executive  
Folio  
184 x 267 mm  
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)  
X
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Legal  
257 x 364 mm  
(10.1 x 14.3 in.)  
182 x 257 mm  
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
X
Letter  
Statement1  
Tabloid  
Universal  
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in.)  
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
X
X
X
X
279 x 432 mm  
(11 x 17 in.)  
100 x 148 mm  
(3.9 x 5.8 in.) up to  
305 x 483 mm  
(11.7 x 19 in.)2  
X
7 3/4 Envelope  
(Monarch)  
98 x 191 mm  
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B5 Envelope  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)  
C5 Envelope  
162 x 229 mm  
(6.4 x 9 in.)  
1 The printer cannot simultaneously sense A5 and statement paper sizes. From the Size Sensing menu, specify  
which size you want the printer to detect. This setting applies to all automatic trays except the multipurpose feeder.  
The multipurpose feeder can support both sizes.  
2 Measurements apply to simplex (one-sided) printing only. For duplex (two-sided) printing, the minimum size is  
140 x 148 mm (5.5 x 5.8 in.) and the maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in.).  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper size  
Dimensions  
520-sheet  
trays  
High capacity Multipurpose  
Duplex unit  
feeder  
feeder  
(standard or  
optional)  
98 x 225 mm  
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)  
9 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
105 x 241 mm  
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)  
110 x 220 mm  
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)  
1 The printer cannot simultaneously sense A5 and statement paper sizes. From the Size Sensing menu, specify  
which size you want the printer to detect. This setting applies to all automatic trays except the multipurpose feeder.  
The multipurpose feeder can support both sizes.  
2 Measurements apply to simplex (one-sided) printing only. For duplex (two-sided) printing, the minimum size is  
140 x 148 mm (5.5 x 5.8 in.) and the maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in.).  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer  
The printer engine supports 60–220 g/m2 (16–60 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 63–170 g/m2 (17–  
45 lb) paper weights.  
Paper type  
520-sheet trays  
High capacity  
feeder  
Multipurpose  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
Plain Paper  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Card stock  
Glossy paper  
Paper labels*  
Transparencies  
Envelopes  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* Vinyl labels are not supported.  
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher  
Use this table to determine the possible output destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and  
weights. The paper capacity of each output bin is listed in parentheses. Paper capacity estimations are calculated  
based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Finisher standard bin and Bin 1 support 60–220 g/m2 (16–60 lb) paper weights. Bin 2 (booklet-maker) supports  
60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb) paper weights plus one additional cover weighted up to 220 g/m2 (60 lb).  
Paper type  
Horizontal  
transport unit  
Finisher  
standard bin (500  
sheets)  
Bin 1 (1500/3000  
sheets)*  
Bin 2  
(300 sheets)  
(50 sheets)  
Plain Paper  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Card stock  
Glossy paper  
Labels  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transparencies  
Envelopes  
X
* Bin 1 of the booklet finisher supports 1500 sheets. Bin 1 of the standard finisher supports 3000 sheets.  
Supported finishing features  
1
2
Horizontal transport unit  
Finisher standard bin  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
4
Finisher bin 1  
Finisher bin 2 (booklet-maker)  
Notes:  
• The finisher shown above, is the booklet finisher. Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed.  
• All paper capacities are based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.  
Horizonal transport unit  
• The paper capacity is 50 sheets.  
• Finishing options are not supported in this bin.  
• Envelopes are routed here.  
• Universal paper is routed here when it is longer than 483 mm (19 in.) or shorter than 148 mm (5.8 in.).  
Finisher standard bin  
• The paper capacity is 500 sheets.  
• Envelopes and executive-size paper are not supported in this bin.  
• Finishing options are not supported in this bin.  
Bin 1  
• The paper capacity is 3000 sheets when the standard finisher is installed.  
• The paper capacity is 1500 sheets when the booklet finisher is installed.  
Bin 1 finishing features  
Punch*  
Size  
A3  
Offset  
Single/double staple Double dual staple  
A4  
A5  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Executive  
Folio  
X
X
X
X
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Legal  
Letter  
X
* For the Universal paper size, the finishing edge must be at least 9 in. (229 mm) for a 3-hole punch and 10 in.  
(254 mm) for a 4-hole punch.  
Punch—Two-, three-, or four-hole punch settings  
Single staple—One staple  
Double staple—Two staples  
Double dual staple—Two sets of two staples. This setting is supported only for widths between 8 in. (203 mm)  
and 11.7 in. (297 mm) with lengths between 7.2 in. (182 mm) and 17 in. (432 mm).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch*  
X
Size  
Offset  
X
Single/double staple Double dual staple  
X
Statement  
Tabloid  
X
Universal  
Envelopes (any  
size)  
X
X
X
X
* For the Universal paper size, the finishing edge must be at least 9 in. (229 mm) for a 3-hole punch and 10 in.  
(254 mm) for a 4-hole punch.  
Punch—Two-, three-, or four-hole punch settings  
Single staple—One staple  
Double staple—Two staples  
Double dual staple—Two sets of two staples. This setting is supported only for widths between 8 in. (203 mm)  
and 11.7 in. (297 mm) with lengths between 7.2 in. (182 mm) and 17 in. (432 mm).  
Bin 2 (booklet-maker)  
Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed. The paper capacity of Bin 2 (booklet-maker) is 300  
sheets or 20 sets of 15-sheet booklets.  
Bin 2 finishing features  
Size  
A3  
Bi fold  
Booklet fold  
Saddle staple  
A4 (only SEF)  
A5  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Executive  
Folio  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Legal  
X
X
X
Letter (only SEF)  
Statement  
Tabloid  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Universal  
SEF—The paper is loaded in the short edge orientation. The short edge of the paper enters the printer first.  
Bi fold—Each page is individually folded and stacked separately.  
Booklet fold—A multiple-page job is folded along the center into a single booklet.  
Saddle staple—A booklet-fold print job is stapled along the center fold.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Size  
Bi fold  
X
Booklet fold  
X
Saddle staple  
X
Envelopes (any size)  
SEF—The paper is loaded in the short edge orientation. The short edge of the paper enters the printer first.  
Bi fold—Each page is individually folded and stacked separately.  
Booklet fold—A multiple-page job is folded along the center into a single booklet.  
Saddle staple—A booklet-fold print job is stapled along the center fold.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
Making copies  
Making a quick copy  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the control panel, press  
.
Note: If an LDSS profile has been installed, you may receive an error when attempting a quick copy. Contact  
your system support person for access.  
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, touch Finish the Job if you are done.  
Copying using the ADF  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
4 Change the copy settings as needed.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Copying using the scanner glass (flatbed)  
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
3 Change the copy settings as needed.  
4 Touch Copy It.  
5 Place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan Next if you have more pages to scan, or  
touch Finish the Job if you are done.  
Touching Finish the Job returns the printer to the copy screen.  
Copying photos  
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass (flatbed) in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
3 Touch Options.  
4 Touch Content.  
5 Touch Photograph.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
7 Touch Scan Next or Done.  
Copying on specialty media  
Making transparencies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Multipurpose Feeder and place  
transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Copying to letterhead  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains letterhead.  
Note: If you do not see Letterhead as an option, load letterhead in the multipurpose feeder, and then touch  
Multipurpose Feeder.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Customizing copy settings  
Copying from one size to another  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.  
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, the printer will scale the size  
automatically.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray  
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty  
media is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded  
and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled  
to fit a single paper size (Example 2).  
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes  
The printer has two paper trays, one tray loaded with letter-size paper and the other with legal-size paper. A document  
that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Sizes.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes  
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.  
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size  
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages  
needs to be copied.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal-size pages to print on  
letter-size paper.  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.  
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.  
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The  
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be  
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.  
To reduce or enlarge a copy:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Scale area, touch  
or  
to enlarge or reduce your output.  
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Adjusting copy quality  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Content.  
6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying:  
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print  
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser  
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images  
7 Touch Copy It.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Collating copies  
If you print multiple copies of a document, you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies  
as groups of pages (not collated).  
Collated  
Not collated  
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, change the setting to Off.  
To turn collation off:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Placing separator sheets between copies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Separator Sheets.  
Note: Collation must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collation is Off, the separator  
sheets are added to the end of the print job.  
6 Select one of the following:  
• Between pages  
• Between copies  
• Between jobs  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet  
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single  
sheet of paper.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Notes:  
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.  
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.  
1 Load an original document faceup and short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Select a duplex setting.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Paper Saver.  
7 Select the output you want.  
For example, if you have four portrait-oriented original documents that you want copied to the same side of one  
sheet, touch 4 on 1 Portrait.  
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.  
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Copy It.  
Creating a custom job (job build)  
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each  
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the  
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with  
the same or different parameters.  
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:  
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.  
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.  
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.  
For example:  
1 Load an original document in the ADF faceup, short edge first.  
2 Adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Custom Job.  
6 Touch On.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9 Load the next document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch  
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.  
Note: If required, change the job settings.  
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown  
on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise,  
touch Finish the job.  
Job interrupt  
Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies.  
Note: The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the control panel, press  
.
Note: If an LDSS profile has been installed, you may receive an error when attempting a quick copy. Contact  
your system support person for access.  
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, touch Finish the Job if you are done.  
Placing information on copies  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Date/Time Stamp.  
6 Touch On.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Placing an overlay message on each page  
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft.  
To place a message on the copies:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Overlay.  
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Canceling a copy job  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF  
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel  
Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass  
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed  
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.  
on the keypad.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The remaining print job is canceled. The home screen appears.  
Understanding the copy screens and options  
Copy from  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.  
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting  
displayed.  
• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes  
(letter-and legal-size pages).  
• When “Copy from” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Copy to  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.  
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting  
displayed.  
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting  
to accommodate the difference.  
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder,  
and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.  
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching  
paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.  
Scale  
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale  
can also be set for you automatically.  
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting  
the “Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document  
information on your copy.  
• Touch  
to decrease the value by 1%; touch  
to increase the value by 1%.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Color  
Touching the Color button tells the printer to copy the original document in color.  
Photo  
Touching the Photo button tells the printer to pay extra attention to shading or tones.  
Note: To copy a color image, make sure the color button is also selected.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex)  
of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided  
copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.  
Note: For two-sided output, you must have a duplex unit attached to the printer.  
Collate  
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The  
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you  
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)  
(3,3,3).  
Options  
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Advanced Imaging, Separator  
Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Date/Time Stamp, Overlay, Content, and Advanced Duplex settings.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Paper Saver  
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is  
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on  
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders  
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.  
Create Booklet  
This option creates a sequence of collated output that, when folded or folded and stapled, forms a booklet half the  
page size of the original document and with all the pages in order.  
Note: To use Create Booklet, you must have a duplex unit attached to the printer.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, Color Balance, and  
mirror image before you copy the document.  
Custom Job (Job Build)  
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
Separator Sheets  
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn  
from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.  
Margin Shift  
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or  
hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional  
margin is too large, the copy will be cropped.  
Edge Erase  
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an  
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the  
selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
Date/Time Stamp  
This option turns the Date/Time Stamp on and prints the date and time at the top of every page.  
Overlay  
This option creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between  
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.  
Note: A custom overlay can be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a button  
with an icon of that overlay will be available.  
Content  
This option enhances copy quality. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.  
• Text—Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art.  
• Text/Photo—Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or  
pictures.  
• Photograph—Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
• Printed Image—Use this setting when copying halftone photographs, documents printed on a laser printer, or  
pages from a magazine or newspaper.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Color—Use this setting to copy the original document in color.  
• Gray—Use this setting to copy the original document in grayscale.  
Advanced Duplex  
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents  
have, and how your documents are bound.  
Improving copy quality  
Question  
Tip  
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy,  
When should I use Text mode?  
and preserving images copied from the original document is not a  
concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics  
such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine  
or newspaper  
When should I use Photograph mode?  
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality  
photograph or inkjet print.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E-mailing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are four ways to send and  
e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, use the address book, or use a  
profile.  
Getting ready to e-mail  
Setting up the e-mail function  
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.  
To set up the e-mail function:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer and, then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
5 Click E-mail Server Setup.  
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
7 Click Submit.  
Setting up the address book  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 Click Manage E-mail Shortcuts.  
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
7 Click Submit.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Manage Destinations.  
Note: You may be asked to enter a password. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system  
support person.  
5 Click E-mail Destination Setup.  
6 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.  
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, separate each address with a comma (,).  
7 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
8 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.  
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.  
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut.  
5 Verify the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.  
If the name or number is incorrect, touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
E-mailing a document  
Sending an e-mail using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
5 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number  
For information on creating shortcuts, see the section in this chapter on creating shortcuts.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press #, and then enter the recipient's shortcut number.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
4 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: box.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add; or search the address book.  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
E-mailing color documents  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6 Touch Color.  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
Using profiles  
Creating an e-mail profile  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
5 Click Manage E-mail Shortcuts.  
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
7 Click Add.  
E-mailing to a profile  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Held Jobs.  
4 Touch Profiles.  
5 Select an e-mail destination from the profile list.  
6 Touch E-mail It.  
Customizing e-mail settings  
Adding e-mail subject and message information  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Subject.  
7 Type the e-mail subject.  
8 Touch Done.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
9 Touch Message.  
10 Type an e-mail message.  
11 Touch Done.  
12 Touch E-mail It.  
Changing the output file type  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided  
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Encrypted PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the files contents from unauthorized access.  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Configuration menu, then  
TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, and is viewable by  
most Web browsers and graphics programs.  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, enter your password twice.  
Canceling an e-mail  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass (flatbed), touch Cancel while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page / Finish the Jobappears.  
Understanding e-mail options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your  
new setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes  
(letter- and legal-size pages).  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
E-mail Subject  
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.  
E-mail Message  
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.  
Resolution  
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Output is a single file.  
• TIFF—Output is a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Configuration menu, then the output is a  
series of one-page files.  
• JPEG—Each page of the output is saved in a separate one-page file. When multiple pages are scanned, the  
output is a series of one-page files.  
• Encrypted PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the files contents from unauthorized access.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail  
address.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan  
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you copy the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first pages of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is  
within the area selected, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
Getting the printer ready to fax  
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.  
CAUTION: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical  
or cabling connections, such as the power supply cord or telephone, during a lightning storm.  
Choosing a fax connection  
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem.  
Note: The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall jack. Other devices (such  
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the  
setup steps. If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter)  
is required.  
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to a telephone line to send and  
receive faxes.  
You can connect the printer to other equipment. See the following table to determine the best way to set up the  
printer.  
Equipment  
Benefits  
Send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
• The printer  
• A telephone cord  
• The printer  
• Use the fax line as a normal telephone line.  
• A telephone  
• Send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
• Two telephone cords  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Equipment  
Benefits  
Receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.  
• The printer  
• A telephone  
• An answering machine  
• Three telephone cords  
Send faxes using the computer or the printer.  
• The printer  
• A telephone  
• A computer modem  
• Three telephone cords  
Using an RJ11 adapter  
Country/region  
• United Kingdom  
• Ireland  
• Finland  
• Italy  
• Sweden  
• Netherlands  
• France  
• Norway  
• Denmark  
• Portugal  
To connect your printer to an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment, use the  
telephone line adapter included in the box with the printer in some countries or regions.  
Note: If you have DSL, do not connect the printer using a splitter because the fax feature may not work correctly.  
1 Connect the adapter to the telephone cord that came with the printer.  
Note: The UK adapter is shown. Your adapter may look different, but it will fit the telephone outlet used in your  
location.  
2 Connect the telephone line of your chosen telecommunications equipment to the left outlet of the adapter.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, follow these steps to connect the  
equipment:  
1 Remove the plug from the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment you connect to the printer by way  
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.  
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Warning: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country/region  
• Saudi Arabia  
• United Arab Emirates  
• Egypt  
• Bulgaria  
• Czech Republic  
• Belgium  
• Israel  
• Hungary  
• Poland  
• Romania  
• Russia  
• Slovenia  
• Spain  
• Australia  
• South Africa  
• Greece  
• Turkey  
To connect a telephone, an answering machine, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer:  
1 Remove the plug from the back of the printer.  
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment that you connect to the printer by way  
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country/region  
• Germany  
• Austria  
• Switzerland  
There is a plug installed in the EXT port  
printer.  
of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the  
Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones  
or answering machines) may not work.  
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany  
Connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
Note: In Germany (and some other countries), the printer ships with a special RJ-11 plug in the EXT port. Do not  
remove the RJ-11 plug. It is required for both the fax and telephone to work properly.  
1 Make sure you have a telephone cord (provided with the product) and a telephone wall jack.  
2 Connect one end of the telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer.  
3 Connect the other end of the telephone cord into the N slot of an active telephone wall jack.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, connect a second telephone  
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active telephone wall jack.  
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, connect a second  
telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the telephone wall jack.  
Connecting to a telephone  
Connect a telephone to the printer to use the fax line as a normal telephone line. Then set up the printer wherever  
your telephone is located to make copies or to send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• Two telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
2 Connect one telephone cord to the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect the other telephone cord to a telephone, and then plug it into the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Connecting to an answering machine  
Connect an answering machine to the printer to receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• An answering machine  
• Three telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
2 Connect one telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall  
jack.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the answering machine.  
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the answering machine to the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Connecting to a computer with a modem  
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• A computer with a modem  
• Three telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Connect a telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.  
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.  
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the EXT port  
of the printer.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the outgoing fax name and number  
To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
7 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.  
8 Click Submit.  
Setting the date and time  
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may  
have to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Set Date and Time.  
5 Click inside the Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.  
6 Click Submit.  
Turning daylight saving time on or off  
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Set Date and Time.  
5 In the Daylight Savings box, click on one of the following:  
Yes turns daylight saving on.  
No turns daylight saving off.  
6 Click Submit.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax using the control panel  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.  
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then type the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or  
search the address book.  
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to:  
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax using the computer  
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility  
of faxing documents directly from software programs.  
1 From your software program, click File Œ Print.  
2 From the Print window, select your printer, and then click Properties.  
Note: In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your  
printer.  
3 Choose the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.  
4 Click OK, and then click OK again.  
5 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.  
6 Click Send.  
Creating shortcuts  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the control panel each time you want to send a fax,  
you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single fax  
number or a group of fax numbers.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Manage Destinations.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.  
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.  
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.  
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).  
7 Assign a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
8 Click Add.  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number.  
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.  
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
6 Verify the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, touch  
Cancel, and reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Using shortcuts and the address book  
Using fax destination shortcuts  
Fax destination shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut  
numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created  
in the Manage Destinations link located under the Configuration tab on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut  
number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax destination with a  
shortcut number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.  
For information on creating shortcuts, see the section in this chapter on creating shortcuts.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press #, and then type the shortcut number.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the address book  
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, contact your system support person.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.  
(Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.)  
6 Touch Search.  
7 Touch the name to add it to the Fax to: list.  
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.  
9 Touch Fax It.  
Customizing fax settings  
Changing the fax resolution  
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra  
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch the button that represents the resolution you want.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Making a fax lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 Touch Options.  
6 From the Darkness area, touch  
to reduce the darkness of the fax, or touch  
to increase the darkness of  
the fax.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Advanced Options.  
7 Touch Delayed Send.  
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission  
are listed in the Fax Queue.  
8 Touch  
to reduce the time or  
to increase the time the fax will be transmitted.  
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is  
grayed out.  
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Fax it.  
Note: The document will scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.  
Viewing a fax log  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Reports.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.  
Canceling an outgoing fax  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass (flatbed), touch Cancel while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page / Finish the Jobappears.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory  
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.  
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.  
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.  
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the  
job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.  
Understanding fax options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes  
(letter- and legal-size pages).  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the  
quality and size of your scan.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.  
Resolution  
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo,  
a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the  
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.  
• Standard—Suitable for most documents  
• Fine—Recommended for documents with small print  
• Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail  
• Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,  
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.  
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter  
the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful  
in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times  
are cheaper.  
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the  
printer is turned on.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you fax the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning  
is paused, and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is  
within the area selected, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
• Advanced Duplex—Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has, and whether  
original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge.  
Improving fax quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms,  
and documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains  
a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken  
from a magazine or newspaper.  
Holding and forwarding faxes  
Holding faxes  
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually  
or at a scheduled day or time.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 Click Holding Faxes.  
7 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.  
8 In the Held Fax Mode box, click one of the following:  
• Off  
• Always On  
• Manual  
• Scheduled  
9 If you selected Scheduled, continue with the following steps. Otherwise, go to step 10.  
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.  
b In the action box, click Hold faxes.  
c In the time box, click the time you want the held faxes released.  
d In the Day(s) box, click the day you want the held faxes released.  
10 Click Add.  
Forwarding a fax  
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 Click inside the Fax Forwarding box, and then select one of the following:  
• Print  
• Print and Forward  
• Forward  
7 Click inside the Forward to box, and then select one of the following:  
• Fax  
• E-mail  
• FTP  
• LDSS  
8 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.  
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward  
to” box.  
9 Click Submit.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning to an FTP address  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may  
be sent to the server at a time.  
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes  
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also  
be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending  
a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over  
your network instead of over the phone line.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Type the FTP address.  
5 Touch Send It.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number  
For information on creating shortcuts, see the section in this chapter on creating shortcuts.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.  
4 Touch Send It.  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.  
7 Touch Send It.  
Creating shortcuts  
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an  
FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for  
creating shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.  
Creating an FTP destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Manage Destinations.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
5 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.  
6 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.  
7 Enter a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
8 Click Add.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Creating an FTP destination shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
2 Type the address of the FTP site.  
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut.  
Understanding FTP options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your  
new setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes  
(letter- and legal-size pages).  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Output is a single file.  
• TIFF—Output is a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Configuration menu, then the output is a  
series of one-page files.  
• JPEG—Each page of the output is saved in a separate one-page file. When multiple pages are scanned, the  
output is a series of one-page files.  
• Encrypted PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the files contents from unauthorized access.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.  
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP  
site, computer, e-mail address, or the printer.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log,  
Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, and Mirror Image before you  
scan the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first pages of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is  
within the area selected, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out  
Improving FTP quality  
Question  
Tip  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a  
When should I use Text mode?  
document to an FTP site, and preserving images copied from the  
original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of  
photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory  
device  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as  
postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media  
(such as magazine clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a USB flash memory device. The computer does  
not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document  
back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile  
to the printer.  
Scanning to a computer  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 If the Java applet screen appears, click Yes.  
4 Click Scan Profile.  
5 Click Create Scan Profile.  
6 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.  
7 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.  
8 Enter a profile name.  
The profile name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.  
9 Click Submit.  
10 Review the instructions on the Scan to PC screen.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number  
when you are ready to scan your documents.  
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
c Press #, followed by the shortcut number on the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and then  
touch Profiles.  
d After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program  
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, locate your shortcut on the list.  
11 Return to the computer to view the file.  
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.  
Scanning to a USB flash memory device  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 Insert the USB flash memory device into the USB direct interface on the front of the printer.  
The Held Jobs screen appears.  
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.  
5 Select the scan settings.  
6 Touch Scan It.  
Understanding scan to computer options  
Quick Setup  
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:  
Custom  
Photo - Color JPEG  
Photo - Color TIFF  
Text - BW PDF  
Text - BW TIFF  
Text/Photo - BW PDF  
Text/Photo - Color PDF  
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as  
needed.  
Format Type  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Output is a single file.  
• TIFF—Output is a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Configuration menu, then the output is a  
series of one-page files.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• JPEG—Each page of the output is saved in a separate one-page file. When multiple pages are scanned, the  
output is a series of one-page files.  
Compression  
This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file.  
Default Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the  
quality and size of your scanned file.  
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes  
to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases  
the amount of information saved.  
Color  
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to scan.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The scan screen appears with your  
new setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes  
(letter- and legal-size pages).  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Color Balance, Background Removal, Contrast, and Shadow Detail before you scan the  
document.  
• Color Balance—Adjusts hue shifts in the color output. Touch  
decrease the color value.  
to increase the color value, or touch  
to  
• Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Touch  
touch to decrease the white portion.  
to increase the white portion, or  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
• Contrast—Touch  
to increase the contrast, or touch  
to decrease the contrast.  
• Shadow Detail—Touch  
detail in the shadows.  
to increase the visible detail in the shadows, or touch  
to decrease the visible  
Improving scan quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan,  
and preserving images copied from the original document is not a  
concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken  
from a magazine or newspaper.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing  
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancellation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty  
media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" and "Storing print media."  
Installing printer software  
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically  
installed during the initial printer setup. For more information, see the Setup sheet or Setup Guide that shipped with  
the printer or click Install printer and software on the Software and Documentation CD.  
When Print is chosen from a software application, a dialog representing the printer driver opens. Click Properties,  
Preferences, Options, or Setup from the initial Print dialog to open Print Properties and see all of the available  
printer settings that may be changed. If a feature in Print Properties is unfamiliar, open the online Help for more  
information.  
Note: Print settings selected from the driver override the default settings selected from the control panel.  
Printing a document  
Printing a document from Windows  
1 With a document open, click File Œ Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Adjust the settings.  
4 Click OK.  
5 Click OK or Print.  
Printing a document from a Macintosh computer  
1 With a document open, choose File Œ Print.  
2 From the Copies & Pages or General pop-up menu, adjust the settings.  
3 Click OK or Print.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs  
Holding jobs in the printer  
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify in the Print Properties that you want the printer to hold the job in  
memory until you start the job from the control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are  
called held jobs.  
Note: Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, and Verify print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to  
process additional held jobs.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Job type  
Description  
Confidential  
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN  
in Print Properties. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The  
job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the control panel  
and choose to print or delete the job.  
Repeat  
Reserve  
Verify  
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of  
the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later.  
You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.  
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job  
immediately. It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The  
job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.  
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the  
remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy  
to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies  
are printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows  
1 With a document open, click File Œ Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.  
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential  
job, also enter a four-digit PIN.  
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.  
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
7 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch  
until  
your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
9 Enter your PIN.  
10 Touch the job you want to print.  
11 Touch Print, or touch  
to increase the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs  
continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer  
1 With a document open, choose File Œ Print.  
2 From the Copies & Pages or General pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.  
a When using Mac OS 9, if Job Routing is not a choice from the pop-up menu, choose  
Plug-in Preferences Œ Print Time Filters.  
b Turn down the disclosure triangle to the left of Print Time Filters, and then choose Job Routing.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 From the radio group, select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user  
name. For a confidential job, also enter a four-digit PIN.  
4 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
5 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch  
until  
your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
6 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
7 Enter your PIN.  
8 Touch the job you want to print.  
9 Touch Print, or touch  
to increase the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs  
continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
Printing from a USB flash memory device  
A USB Direct interface is located on the control panel. Insert a USB flash memory device to print supported file types.  
Supported file types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.  
Many USB flash memory devices are tested and approved for use with the printer. For more information, visit the  
Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes:  
• Hi-Speed USB devices must support the Full-speed standard. Devices supporting only USB Low-speed  
capabilities are not supported.  
• USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New  
Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.  
• If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, enter the enter the file password from the control panel.  
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the control panel.  
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.  
To print from a USB flash memory device:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyor Busyappears.  
2 Insert a USB flash memory device into the USB Direct interface.  
Notes:  
• If you insert the memory device when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, the  
printer ignores the memory device.  
• If you insert the memory device while the printer is printing other jobs, Printer Busyappears. After the  
other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash memory  
device.  
3 Touch the document you want to print.  
Note: Folders found on the flash memory device appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension  
type (for example, .jpg).  
4 Touch  
if you want to increase the number of printed copies.  
5 Touch Print.  
Note: Do not remove the USB flash memory device from the USB Direct interface until the document has finished  
printing.  
If you leave the USB flash memory device in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, you can still  
print .pdf's from the USB flash memory device as held jobs.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing information pages  
Printing a menu settings page  
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.  
Printing a network setup page  
If the printer is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also  
provides important information that aids network printing configuration.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.  
Printing a directory list  
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the hard disk.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Reports.  
4 Touch  
repeatedly until Print Directory appears.  
5 Touch Print Directory.  
Printing the print quality test pages  
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
4 Touch  
repeatedly until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
5 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
6 Touch Exit Config Menu.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Canceling a print job  
There are several methods for canceling a print job. The following sections explain how to cancel a print job from  
the control panel or from a computer (depending on the operating system).  
Canceling a print job from the control panel  
If the job is formatting or already printing, and Cancel a jobappears on the display, touch Cancel Job on the  
touch screen.  
A “Canceling job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the home screen appears.  
Canceling a print job from the Windows taskbar  
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.  
1 Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2 Select a job to cancel.  
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
Canceling a print job from the Windows desktop  
1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.  
2 Double-click the My Computer icon.  
3 Double-click the Printers icon.  
4 Double-click the printer icon.  
5 Select the job to cancel.  
6 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
Canceling a print job from Mac OS 9  
When you send a job to print, the printer icon for your selected printer appears on the desktop.  
1 Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2 Choose a job to cancel.  
3 Click the trash icon.  
Canceling a print job from Mac OS X  
1 Choose Applications Œ Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
2 Double-click the printer you are printing to.  
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.  
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Printing in black and white  
To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge, set the printer to Black Only.  
Note: The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Settings.  
4 Touch  
5 Touch  
6 Touch  
repeatedly until Quality Menu appears.  
repeatedly until Print Mode appears.  
repeatedly until Black Only appears.  
7 Touch Black Only.  
Using Max Speed and Max Yield  
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings allow you to choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield.  
Max Speed is the factory default setting.  
• Max Speed—Prints in a black only mode until it receives a page with color content. Then, it prints in color and  
does not switch to black only until it receives ten consecutive black-and-white pages.  
• Max Yield—Switches from black to color mode based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color  
mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.  
To specify the setting:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the network printer or print server IP address, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Print Settings.  
5 Click Setup Menu.  
6 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.  
7 Click Submit.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
Avoiding jams  
The following hints can help you avoid jams:  
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.  
For more information, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com/publications.  
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.  
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled paper.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.  
• Store the paper in an appropriate environment.  
• Do not remove trays while the printer is printing. Wait for Load tray <x>or Readyto appear before removing  
a tray.  
• Do not load the manual feeder while the printer is printing. Wait for Load Manual feeder with <x>to  
appear.  
• Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.  
• Make sure the guides in the trays are properly positioned, and are not pressing too tightly against the paper.  
• Make sure all paper sizes and paper types are set correctly in the control panel menu.  
• Make sure all printer cables are attached correctly. For more information, see the setup documentation.  
Understanding jam numbers and locations  
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. The following illustration and table list the paper  
jams that can occur and the location of each jam. Open doors and covers, and remove trays to access jam locations.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Jam numbers Area name  
Instructions  
200–203  
230–231  
241  
Door A  
Door B  
Door C  
Open Door A, and then remove the jam.  
Open Doors A and B, and then remove any jams.  
1
2
3
Open Door C, and then remove the jam.  
Open Tray 1, and then remove any jams.  
242–244  
250  
Door D  
Open Door D, and then remove the jam.  
4
5
Open Trays 2–4, and then remove any jams.  
Multipurpose feeder  
1 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.  
2 Flex and stack the paper.  
3 Reload the multipurpose feeder.  
4 Adjust the paper guide.  
6
7
280–282  
Cover F  
Open Cover F, and then remove the jam.  
(Horizontal Transport Unit)  
283–284  
287–288  
289  
Door G  
Open Door G, and then remove the jam.  
For staple jams, remove the paper from the accumulator.  
Remove the staple cartridge, and then clear the staple jam.  
8
9
284–286  
Door H  
Open Door H, and then remove the jam.  
Door H is located between the finisher output bins.  
290–295  
ADF cover  
Open the ADF cover, and then remove the jam.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200–203 paper jams  
1 Open Door A by lifting the release latch and lowering the door.  
CAUTION: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component,  
allow the surface to cool before touching.  
2 Lift the green lever, and then pull the paper up and toward you.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Push the green lever down.  
4 Close Door A.  
5 Touch Continue.  
230–231 paper jams  
1 Open Door A by lifting the release latch and lowering the door.  
CAUTION: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component,  
allow the surface to cool before touching it.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 Lift the green lever, and then pull the paper up and toward you.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Push the green lever down.  
4 Close Door A.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Pull the multipurpose feeder down, and then open Door B.  
6 Remove the jammed paper.  
7 Close Door B.  
8 Touch Continue.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241 paper jam  
1 Open Door C.  
2 Pull the paper down and toward you.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Close Door C.  
4 Open Tray 1, and then remove any crumpled paper from the tray.  
5 Close the tray.  
6 Touch Continue.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242–244 paper jams  
1 Open Door D.  
2 Pull the paper down and away from the printer.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Close Door D.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Clear crumpled paper from Trays 2–4.  
a Open Tray 2, and then remove any crumpled paper.  
b Close Tray 2.  
c Open Tray 3, and then remove any crumpled paper.  
d Close Tray 3.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e Open Tray 4, and then remove any crumpled paper.  
f Open the inside cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
g Close the inside cover, and then close Tray 4.  
5 Touch Continue.  
250 paper jam  
1 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.  
2 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.  
4 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.  
5 Touch Continue.  
280–282 paper jams  
1 Open Cover F.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
Note: If the paper jam on the right is difficult to remove, rotate the knob clockwise.  
3 Close Cover F.  
4 Touch Continue.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
283–284 and 287–288 paper jams  
Covers, knobs, and handles located behind finisher Door G  
Cover, knob, or handle name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cover G1  
Cover G2  
Knob G3  
Cover G4  
Cover G7  
Knob G8  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cover, knob, or handle name  
Handle G9  
7
1 Open Door G.  
2 Lift both Cover G1 levers, and then remove any jammed paper.  
3 Move Cover G2 to the right, and then remove any jammed paper.  
Note: If the paper is jammed in the rollers, rotate Knob G3 counterclockwise.  
4 Move Cover G4 down, and then remove any jammed paper.  
5 Move Cover G7 to the left, and then remove any jammed paper.  
6 Pull Handle G9 until the tray is completely open.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Lift the inside cover. If the paper is jammed in the rollers, rotate Knob G8 clockwise, and then remove the jammed  
paper.  
8 Close Door G.  
9 Touch Continue.  
284–286 paper jams  
1 Open Door H.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
3 Close Door H.  
4 Touch Continue.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
289 staple jam  
1 Open Door G.  
2 Slide the G5 stapler toward the front of the finisher.  
3 Lift the lever, and then remove the staple cartridge.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Open the staple cover.  
5 Remove the jammed staple, and then close the cover.  
6 Place the staple cartridge into the upper stapler.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Open the lower staple drawer.  
8 Remove the staple cartridge identified on the display.  
9 Remove the jammed staples, and then place the staple cartridge into the stapler.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Close the staple drawer.  
11 Close Door G.  
12 Touch Continue.  
290–295 paper jams  
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.  
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
3 Raise the sheet guard, and then remove any jammed paper.  
Note: If the jammed paper cannot be remove easily, rotate the paper advance wheel to the left.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Close the ADF cover.  
5 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.  
6 Close the scanner cover.  
7 Touch Continue.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
Menus list  
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus,  
touch  
on the home screen.  
Supplies Menu  
Paper Menu  
Reports  
Cyan Toner  
Default Source  
Paper Size/Type  
Configure MP  
Substitute Size  
Paper Texture  
Paper Loading  
Custom Types  
Custom Names  
Custom Bin Names  
Universal Setup  
Bin Setup  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Network Setup Page  
Shortcut List  
Yellow Toner  
Magenta Toner  
Black Toner  
Cyan PC Unit  
Yellow PC Unit  
Magenta PC Unit  
Black PC Unit  
Waste Toner Box  
Staples G5  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Staples G12  
NetWare Setup Page  
Print Fonts  
Staples G11  
Hole Punch Box  
Print Directory  
Settings  
Network/Ports  
Help  
General Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
TCP/IP  
Print all guides  
Copy guide  
IPv6  
E-mail Server Setup  
Active NIC  
Standard Network  
Standard USB  
NetWare  
E-mail guide  
Fax guide  
E-mail Settings  
FTP Settings  
FTP guide  
Scan to USB Settings  
Print Settings  
Information guide  
Print defects guide  
Supplies guide  
Security  
AppleTalk  
Set Date and Time  
LexLink  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Supplies menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black Toner  
Shows the status of the toner cartridges  
Low  
Replace  
Missing or Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black PC Units  
Shows the status of the photoconductor units  
Life Warning  
Replace  
Missing  
OK  
Normal  
Waste Toner Box  
Near Full  
Replace  
Shows the status of the waste toner bottle  
Shows the status of the staples  
Missing  
OK  
Staples G5, Staples G11, or Staples G12  
Low  
Empty  
Missing  
OK  
Shows the status of the hole punch box  
Hole Punch Box  
Full  
Missing  
OK  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper menu  
Default Source menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Default Source  
Tray <x>  
Notes:  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Env  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.  
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source  
setting for the duration of the print job.  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size  
and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically linked.  
When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Paper Size/Type menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Tray <x> Size  
11 x 17  
A3  
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
A4  
A5  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Folio  
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the  
hardware appears.  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper  
Size and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically  
linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Legal  
Letter  
Statement  
Tray <x> Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x>  
is the factory default setting for all other trays.  
• If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom  
Type <x>.  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.  
Colored Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
MP Feeder Size  
11 x 17  
Notes:  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Executive  
Folio  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in  
order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size.  
The paper size value must be set.  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Legal  
Letter  
Statement  
Universal  
7 3/4 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
MP Feeder Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in  
order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu selection.  
• Plain paper is the factory default setting.  
Labels  
Bond  
Envelope  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded  
Manual Paper Size  
11 x 17  
A3  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international  
factory default setting.  
A4  
A5  
Executive  
Folio  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Legal  
Letter  
Statement  
Universal  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded  
Manual Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Manual Envelope Size  
7 3/4 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded  
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the  
international factory default setting.  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Manual Envelope Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded  
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.  
Custom Type <x>  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Configure MP menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Configure MP  
Cassette  
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
Manual  
• Cassette is the factory default setting.  
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an  
automatic paper source.  
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only  
for manual feed print jobs.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Substitute Size menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Substitute Size  
Off  
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not  
available  
Statement/A5  
Letter/A4  
11 x 17/A3  
All Listed  
Notes:  
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are  
allowed.  
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.  
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper  
message appearing.  
Paper Texture menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Plain Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Card Stock Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.  
Transparency Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Glossy Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the Glossy paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Labels Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Bond Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Envelope Texture  
Smooth  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Letterhead Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Preprinted Texture  
Smooth  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Colored Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Custom <x> Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Paper Loading menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Card Stock Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Card Stock as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Labels Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Labels as the paper type  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Bond Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Bond as the paper type  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Letterhead Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Letterhead as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from  
Print Properties.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1-sided jobs.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Preprinted as the paper type  
Preprinted Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Colored Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Colored as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Glossy Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
Glossy as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Custom <x> as the paper type  
Custom <x> Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is  
supported.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from  
Print Properties.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1-sided jobs.  
Custom Types menu  
Menu item  
Definition  
Custom Type <x>  
Paper  
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom  
Type <x>name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the  
Embedded Web page.  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Labels  
Bond  
Notes:  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• Custom Type <x>appears unless a user-defined Custom Name is  
configured from the Embedded Web server or MarkVision.  
Envelope  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or  
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.  
Custom Names menu  
Menu item  
Definition  
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom  
Custom Name <x>  
Type <x>name in the printer menus.  
<none>  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Custom Bin Names menu  
Menu Item  
Description  
Standard Bin  
Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin  
<none>  
Bin 1  
Specifies a custom name for Bin 1  
<none>  
Universal Setup menu  
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal  
Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar  
options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.  
Menu item  
Description  
Units of Measure  
Inches  
Identifies the units of measure  
Notes:  
Millimeters  
• Inches is the US factory default setting.  
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.  
Portrait Width  
3–48 inches  
Sets the portrait width  
Notes:  
76–1219 mm  
• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum  
width allowed.  
• 12 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be  
increased in 0.01-inch increments.  
• 305 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Sets the portrait height  
Portrait Height  
3–48 inches  
Notes:  
76–1219 mm  
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the  
maximum height allowed.  
• 19 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be  
increased in 0.01-inch increments.  
• 483 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Specifies the feed direction  
Notes:  
Feed Direction  
Short Edge  
Long Edge  
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the  
maximum length supported in the tray.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Bin Setup menu  
Menu Item  
Description  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Identifies installed output bins  
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.  
Bin 2  
Configure Bins  
Mailbox  
Specifies configuration options for output bins  
Notes:  
Link  
• Mailbox is the factory default setting.  
• The booklet-maker bin (Bin 2) cannot be linked to  
another bin. Bin 2 folds all print jobs.  
Link Optional  
Type Assignment  
• The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate  
mailbox.  
• The Link setting links together all available output  
bins.  
• The Link Optional setting links together all  
available output bins except the standard bin.  
• The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper  
type to an output bin.  
Selects an output bin for each supported paper type  
Assign Type/Bins  
Plain Paper Bin  
Card Stock Bin  
Transparency Bin  
Glossy Bin  
Available selections for each type are:  
Disabled  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Labels Bin  
Bond Bin  
Notes:  
• Disabled is the factory default setting.  
Letterhead Bin  
Preprinted Bin  
Colored Bin  
• The factory default setting will change to Standard  
Bin if the Configure Bins menu is set to Type  
Assignment. Then, all print jobs will be sent to the  
standard exit bin until you reassign paper types to  
different bins by using the Assign Type/Bins menu.  
Custom <x> Bin  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reports menu  
Reports menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays,  
installed memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel  
language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the  
network connection, and other information  
Menu Settings Page  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and  
details about printed pages  
Device Statistics  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
Network Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings,  
such as the TCP/IP address information  
<none>  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
• The page prints when this item is selected.  
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts  
Shortcut List  
<none>  
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes  
Fax Job Log  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
Fax Call Log  
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted,  
received, and blocked calls  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
Fax Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
FTP Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
Profiles List  
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer  
<none>  
Note: The page prints when this item is selected.  
NetWare Setup Page  
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network  
settings  
<none>  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server  
installed.  
• The page prints when this item is selected.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently  
set in the printer  
Print Fonts  
<none>  
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or  
printer hard disk  
Print Directory  
<none>  
Notes:  
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.  
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed  
correctly and working properly.  
• The page prints when this item is selected.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings menu  
General Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display  
Display Language  
English  
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.  
Francais  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Portuguese  
Suomi  
Russian  
Polski  
Simplified Chinese  
Korean  
Japanese  
Specifies a language for the printer control panel keyboard  
Keyboard  
Keyboard Type  
English  
Francais  
Francais Canadien  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Suomi  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Polski  
Simplified Chinese  
Korean  
Japanese  
Keyboard  
Specifies custom key information for the printer control panel  
keyboard  
Custom Key <x>  
<none>  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Keyboard  
Description  
Enables access to accent marks and symbols from the printer  
control panel keyboard  
Accents/Symbols Tab  
Available selections for each menu item are:  
Russian/Polish Tab  
Korean Tab  
On  
Off  
General Defaults  
U.S.  
Specifies the printer factory defaults  
International  
Show Initial Prompts  
Launches a setup wizard when the printer is powered on  
Notes:  
Yes  
No  
• Yes is the factory default setting.  
• When Done is selected from the Country select screen,  
the factory default setting switches to Off.  
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners  
of the home screen  
Displayed Information  
Left side  
Choose from the following options:  
IP Address  
Right side  
Custom Text <x>  
None  
Hostname  
Contact Name  
Location  
Date/Time  
mDNS/DDNS Service Name  
Zero Configuration Name  
Custom Text <x>  
None  
Notes:  
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.  
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.  
Date Format  
MM-DD-YYYY  
YYYY-MM-DD  
Formats the printer date  
Time Format  
Formats the printer time  
12 hour A.M./P.M.  
24 hour clock  
Screen Brightness  
Specifies the brightness of the control panel screen  
20–100  
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held  
Jobs area  
Show Bookmarks  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected,  
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed  
during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB  
Allow Background Removal  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the  
image will be removed.  
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file  
Allow Custom Job Scans  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the  
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific  
jobs.  
Scanner Jam Recovery  
Job level  
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam  
occurs in the ADF  
Page level  
Notes:  
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned  
if any pages jam.  
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page  
forward.  
Web Page Refresh Rate  
Specifies the number of seconds between embedded Web  
page refreshes  
30–300  
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Specifies a contact name for the printer  
Contact Name  
<none>  
Note: The contact name will be stored on the embedded Web  
page.  
Location  
Specifies the location of the printer  
<none>  
Note: The contact name will be stored on the embedded Web  
page.  
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator  
intervention  
Alarms  
Alarm Control  
Toner Alarm  
Staple Alarm  
Hole Punch Alarm  
Available selections for each alarm type are:  
Off  
Single  
Continuous  
Notes:  
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.  
Single sounds three quick beeps.  
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm, Staple  
Alarm, and Hole Punch Alarm. Off means no alarm will  
sound.  
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.  
• Stapler Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm are available only  
when the finisher is installed.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Timeouts  
Description  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system  
enters a lower power state  
Standby Mode  
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.  
Disabled  
2–240  
Timeouts  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some  
systems begin entering a minimum power state.  
Power Saver Mode  
Disabled  
Notes:  
2–240  
• 60 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.  
• Changing Power Saver should not cause Standby Mode  
to be changed.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before  
returning the printer display to a Readystate  
Screen Timeout  
15–300  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive  
an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the  
print job  
Print Timeout  
Disabled  
1–255  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in  
the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if  
any new print jobs are waiting.  
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS  
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript  
emulation print jobs.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for  
additional data before canceling a print job  
Wait Timeout  
Disabled  
Notes:  
15–65535  
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using  
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or  
PPDS emulation print jobs.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can  
take before it is canceled  
Network Job Timeout  
1–255  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.  
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, the setting will be saved as  
10.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain  
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time  
period  
Print Recovery  
Auto Continue  
Disabled  
Notes:  
5–255  
• Disabled is the factory default setting.  
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.  
Print Recovery  
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages  
Jam Recovery  
Notes:  
On  
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints  
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the  
pages is needed for other printer tasks.  
Off  
Auto  
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.  
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.  
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have  
printed otherwise  
Print Recovery  
Page Protect  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page  
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.  
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the  
entire page prints.  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not  
Restore keeps the user-defined settings.  
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default  
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored  
in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Content  
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Printed Image  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.  
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and  
pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes  
a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.  
This increases the amount of information saved.  
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images.  
Printed Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a  
grayscale or color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small  
spots with a limited number of colors.  
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white  
background.  
Specifies whether a copy job is printed in color  
Enables color copying  
Color  
On  
Off  
Allow Color copies  
On  
Off  
Duplex  
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-  
sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex  
1 sided to 1 sided  
1 sided to 2 sided  
2 sided to 1 sided  
2 sided to 2 sided  
Notes:  
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on one side.  
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six  
sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.  
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The  
copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original  
draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet,  
then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.  
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy  
mimics the original exactly.  
Specifies if a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins  
Print Page Borders  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
On  
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple  
copies of the job  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Enables hole punching  
Punch  
On  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Staple  
On  
Enables stapling  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Statement  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Copy To Source  
Tray <x>  
Provides a list of possible paper sources to send the copy job to for printing  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Size Match  
Manual Feeder  
Transparency Separators  
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value  
selected  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Between Pages  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source  
Manual Feeder  
Darkness  
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job  
-5 to +5  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job  
Number of Copies  
<none>  
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job  
Overlay  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Urgent  
Confidential  
Copy  
Draft  
Custom  
Custom  
Specifies custom overlay text  
<none>  
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document  
Allow priority copies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
On  
Off  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Color Balance  
Cyan - Red  
Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner  
being used for each color  
Magenta - Green  
Yellow - Blue  
Fax Settings menu  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu  
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.  
General Fax Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer  
Station Name  
<none>  
Specifies a number associated with the fax  
Specifies how the fax is identified  
Station Number  
<none>  
Station ID  
Station Name  
Station Number  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a  
telephone hand set  
Enable Manual Fax  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax  
number.  
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.  
Defines the amount of non-volatile memory used in relation to fax for a fax job  
Notes:  
Memory Use  
All receive  
Mostly receive  
Equal  
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending  
and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.  
Mostly sent  
All send  
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs  
Cancel Faxes  
Allow  
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.  
Don't Allow  
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number  
Fax number masking  
Off  
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”  
setting.  
From left  
From right  
Digits to mask  
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number  
0–58  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Send Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print  
quality, but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.  
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
A3  
A4  
A5  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
4 x 6  
3 x 5  
Business Card  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Duplex  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
-5 to +5  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Dial Prefix  
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers  
<none>  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified  
number  
Automatic Redial  
0–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Redial Frequency  
Specifies the number of minutes between redials  
1–200  
Behind a PABX  
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone  
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs  
Off  
On  
Enable ECM  
On  
Off  
Enable Fax Scans  
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer  
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer  
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent  
On  
Off  
Driver to fax  
On  
Off  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Max Speed  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
On  
Off  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
Scan edge to edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Fax Receive Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Fax Receive  
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job  
Rings to Answer  
1–25  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Reduction  
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the  
designated fax source  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Paper Source  
Auto  
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an  
incoming fax  
Tray <x>  
MP Feeder  
Specifies an output bin for received faxes  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Note: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.  
Duplex  
On  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs  
Off  
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received  
fax  
Fax Footer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received  
Max Speed  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient  
Fax Forwarding  
Forward  
Print  
Print and Forward  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded  
Forward to  
Fax  
Note: This item is available only from the printer embedded Web pages.  
E-mail  
FTP  
LDSS  
Forward to Shortcut  
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-  
mail, FPT, ord LDSS)  
<none>  
Block No Name Fax  
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID  
specified  
On  
Off  
Banned Fax List  
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer  
On  
Off  
Punch  
2 holes  
3 holes  
4 holes  
Off  
Specifies the default hole punch setting for the attached finisher  
Note: Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear.  
Staple  
1 staples  
2 staples  
4 staples  
Off  
Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher  
Note: Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear.  
Fax Log Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Receive Error Log  
Print Never  
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error  
Print on Error  
Enables automatic printing of fax logs  
Auto Print Logs  
On  
Off  
Note: Logs print after every 200 jobs.  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs  
MP Feeder  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name  
returned  
Logs Display  
Remote Station Name  
Dialed Number  
Enable Job Log  
Enables access the Fax Job log  
On  
Off  
Enable Call Log  
Enables access the Fax Call log  
On  
Off  
Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Speaker Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Speaker Mode  
Always Off  
Notes:  
• Always Off turns the speaker off.  
• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and  
issues a noise until the fax connection is made.  
On until Connected  
Always On  
• Always On turns the speaker on.  
Speaker Volume  
Controls the volume setting  
High  
Low  
Note: High is the factory default setting.  
Ringer Volume  
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Distinctive Rings  
Menu item  
Description  
Single Ring  
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Double Ring  
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Triple Ring  
Triple Ring Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Mode (Fax Server) menu  
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.  
Fax Server Setup  
Menu item  
To Format  
Description  
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch  
screen  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Message  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Image Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the image type for scan to fax  
Content  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print.  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Darkness  
5- to 5+  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Landscape  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Original Size  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
A3  
A4  
A5  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Use Multi-Page Tiff  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of  
the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
E-mail Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the format of the file  
PDF (.pdf)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail  
1.2–1.6  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print.  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Color  
Gray  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Resolution  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
-5 to +5  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
A3  
A4  
A5  
Statement  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Duplex  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Photo JPEG Quality  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality  
of the image  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 50 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and  
the quality of the image  
JPEG Quality  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 75 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.  
Specifies how the images will be sent  
E-mail images sent as  
Attachment  
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.  
Web Link  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of  
the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Specifies an output bin for the printed e-mail log  
E-mail Bit Depth  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off.  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Custom Job scanning  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts at the device  
Notes:  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• When set to No, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-  
mail Destination screen.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy.  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
Scan edge to edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
E-mail Server Setup menu  
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP e-mail server.  
Menu item  
Description  
E-mail Server Setup  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Primary SMTP Gateway Port  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port  
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops  
trying to send the e-mail  
E-mail Server Setup  
SMTP Timeout  
5–30  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail  
privileges  
E-mail Server Setup  
SMTP Server Authentication  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Device Userid and password  
User ID and password  
User e-mail and password  
Specifies e-mail server information  
E-mail Server Setup  
Device Userid  
Password  
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Message  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail  
E-mail Server Setup  
Send me a copy  
Never appears  
On by default  
Off by default  
Always On  
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes  
E-mail Server Setup  
Max e-mail size  
0–65535 kB  
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.  
E-mail Server Setup  
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size  
limit  
Size Error Message  
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name,  
such as a company domain name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Limit destinations  
Notes:  
• E-mail can only be sent to the specified domain.  
• The limit is one domain.  
Defines the path name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Web Link Setup  
Server  
Note: Defines the path. For example: /directory/path  
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path  
Login  
name: * : ? < > |.  
Password  
Path  
Base file name  
Web Link  
FTP Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the format of the FTP file  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
JPEG (.jpg)  
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Content  
Description  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP  
Text/Photo  
Notes:  
Photograph  
Text  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Color  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Gray  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Resolution  
75  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
-5 to +5  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
A3  
A4  
A5  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
4 x 6  
3 x 5  
Business Card  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Duplex  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Photo JPEG Quality  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality  
of the image  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 50 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and  
the quality of the image  
JPEG Quality  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 75 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of  
the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Specifies an output bin for the FTP log  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off  
FTP bit Depth  
8 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
1 bit  
Base File Name  
Lets you enter a base file name  
<none>  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Custom Job Scanning  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Contrast  
Best for Content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Scan to USB Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the format of the file  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
JPEG (.jpg)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB  
1.2–1.6  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Content  
Description  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB  
Text/Photo  
Notes:  
Photograph  
Text  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Color  
Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color  
Gray  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Resolution  
75  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
-5 to +5  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Legal  
Executive  
Tabloid  
Folio  
Statement  
A3  
A4  
A5  
JIS B4  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
4 x 6  
3 x 5  
Business Card  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Sizes  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Duplex  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Photo JPEG Quality  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality  
of the image  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 50 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and  
the quality of the image.  
JPEG Quality  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 75 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of  
the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off  
Scan bit Depth  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Enter a base file name  
Base File Name  
<none>  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Off  
On  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Print Settings  
Finishing menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Duplex  
On  
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• To set 2-sided printing from the software program, click File Œ Print, and  
then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
Duplex Bind  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back  
of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait  
pages and the top edge of landscape pages.  
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait  
pages and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
Notes:  
Copies  
1–999  
• 1 is the factory default setting.  
• To specify the number of copies for a specific print job, from the software  
program, click File Œ Print, and then click Properties, Preferences,  
Options, or Setup. Software settings always override control panel  
settings.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Collation  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copy  
menu setting.  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
• None is the factory default setting.  
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if  
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted  
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's, all page 2's,  
and so on.  
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job.  
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages  
in a document for notes.  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Notes:  
MP Feeder  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for  
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Multipage Print  
Off  
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.  
This is also referred to as N-up or Paper Saver.  
2 Up  
3 Up  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
4 Up  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
6 Up  
9 Up  
12 Up  
16 Up  
Multipage Order  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using Multipage Print  
Notes:  
Vertical  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are  
in portrait or landscape orientation.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet  
Multipage View  
Auto  
Notes:  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait  
and landscape.  
• Long Edge uses landscape.  
• Short Edge uses portrait.  
Prints a border around each page image when using Multipage Print  
Multipage Border  
None  
Solid  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the number and position of staples on a print job  
Staple Job  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
Front  
Back  
2 Staples  
4 Staples  
• This menu is available only when the finisher is installed.  
• Off is the factory default setting. Print jobs are not stapled.  
• Auto corner staples every print job.  
• Envelopes are not stapled.  
Hole Punch  
Specifies whether a print job receives hole-punch finishing  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• This menu is available only when the finisher is installed.  
• Off is the factory default setting. Print jobs are not hole punched.  
• The On setting instructs the finisher to hole punch every print job.  
Specifies the number of holes punched  
Hole Punch Mode  
2 holes  
Notes:  
3 holes  
4 holes  
• 3 is the US factory default setting. The 3 holes setting is available only for  
the 3-hole finisher.  
• 4 is the international factory default setting. The 4 holes setting is available  
only for the 4-hole finisher.  
• This menu is available only when the finisher is installed.  
Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin  
Notes:  
Offset Pages  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
• None is the factory default setting. No pages are offset during the print job.  
• Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job.  
• Between Jobs offsets each print job.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quality menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether images are printed in grayscale or in color  
Print Mode  
Color  
Note: Color is the factory default setting.  
Black Only  
Color Correction  
Adjusts the color output on the printed page  
Auto  
Off  
Manual  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion  
tables to each object on the printed page.  
• Off turns off color correction.  
• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available  
from the Manual Color menu.  
• Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that  
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.  
Specifies the printed output resolution  
Print Resolution  
2400 IQ  
Note: 2400 IQ is the factory default setting.  
Lightens or darkens the printed output  
Toner Darkness  
1–5  
Notes:  
• 4 is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.  
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, a setting of 5 increases toner density and  
darkness to all print jobs.  
• If Print Mode is set to Color, a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.  
Color Saver  
Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner  
used for text is not reduced.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• On overrides Toner Darkness settings.  
RGB Brightness  
Adjusts brightness in color outputs  
-6 to +6  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• -6 is the maximum decrease. 6 is the maximum increase.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
RGB Contrast  
Adjusts contrast in color outputs  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Adjusts saturation in color outputs  
RGB Saturation  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.  
Color Balance  
Cyan  
Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner  
being used for each color  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
-5–5  
Magenta  
-5–5  
Yellow  
-5–5  
Black  
-5–5  
Reset Defaults  
Color Samples  
sRGB Display  
sRGB Vivid  
Display—True Black  
Vivid  
Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used  
in the printer  
Notes:  
• Selecting any setting prints the sample.  
• Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or  
CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be  
used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed  
output.  
Off—RGB  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off—CMYK  
• From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a  
complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.  
Customizes the RGB color conversions  
Manual Color  
RGB Image  
Vivid  
Notes:  
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a  
color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a  
computer monitor.  
sRGB Display  
Display—True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.  
sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred  
for business graphics and text.  
RGB Text  
Vivid  
• Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated  
sRGB Display  
Display—True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
colors.  
• Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black  
toner for neutral gray colors.  
• Off turns off color conversion.  
RGB Graphics  
Vivid  
sRGB Display  
Display—True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Customizes the CMYK color conversions  
Manual Color  
CMYK Image  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
Notes:  
• US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color  
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color  
output.  
• Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a  
color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale  
color output.  
CMYK Text  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
• Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion  
table.  
• Off turns off color conversion.  
CMYK Graphics  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
Color Adjust  
Initiates color calibration  
<none>  
Utilities menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the  
user-defined settings.  
• All printer settings are returned to factory default settings except Display  
Language and the settings in the Parallel menu, Serial menu, Network  
menu, and USB menu.  
• All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash  
memory or on the printer hard disk are not affected.  
Formats the printer hard disk  
Format Disk  
Yes  
No  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly  
for this menu item to be available. The disk must not be Read/Write or Write  
protected.  
• No cancels the format request.  
• Selecting Yes deletes all stored data and reformats the printer hard disk.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer  
hard disk  
Job Acct Stat  
Print  
Clear  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly  
for this menu item to be available.  
• Selecting Print prints a list of statistics.  
• Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk. Clearing  
job account statisticsappears on the display.  
• The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to  
MarkTrackTM  
.
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem  
Activate Hex Trace  
<none>  
Notes:  
• When Hex Trace is activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in  
hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not  
executed.  
• To exit Hex Trace, turn the printer off, or reset the printer.  
Coverage Estimator  
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of cyan, magenta, yellow,  
and black on a page. The estimate is printed on a separator page.  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Printer Language  
PS Emulation  
Specifies the printer language used to communicate data from the computer  
to the printer  
PCL Emulation  
Notes:  
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs. PostScript  
emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs. PPDS emulation  
uses a PPDS interpreter for processing print jobs.  
• The factory default printer language varies depending on the type of printer  
purchased.  
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a program from  
sending print jobs that use another printer language.  
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and  
macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more  
memory than is available  
Resource Save  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain the downloads  
only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process  
print jobs.  
• The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer  
resets. If the printer runs out of memory, 38 Memory Fullappears, and  
downloads are not deleted.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Prints all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge  
Black Only Mode  
Off  
On  
Printer Usage  
Max Speed  
Max Yield  
Specifies how the printer processes jobs with black and white and color  
information  
Notes:  
• Max Speed prints in a black only mode until it receives a page with color  
content. Then, it prints in color and does not switch to black only until it  
receives ten consecutive black-and-white pages.  
• Max Yield switches from black to color mode based on the color content  
found on each page.  
Sets the storage location for downloads  
Notes:  
Download Target  
RAM  
Disk  
• RAM is the factory default setting.  
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them  
in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer  
hard disk even when the printer is turned off.  
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.  
Specifies whether to store statistical information about the most recent print  
jobs on the hard disk  
Job Accounting  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Statistical information includes whether the job printed with errors, the print  
time, the job size (in bytes), the requested paper size and type, the total  
number of printed pages, and the number of copies requested.  
• Job Accounting appears only when the hard disk is installed and working.  
Print Area  
Normal  
Modifies the logical and physical print area  
Notes:  
Whole Page  
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the  
non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the  
image at the boundary.  
• The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the  
non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer will clip  
the image at the Normal setting boundary.  
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e  
interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL,  
PPDS, or PostScript interpreter.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the  
user-defined settings.  
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except  
Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted.  
Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not  
affected.  
PostScript menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print PS Error  
Prints a page containing the PostScript error  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Font Priority  
Resident  
Establishes the font search order  
Notes:  
Flash/Disk  
• Resident is the factory default setting.  
• A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be  
installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be  
available.  
• The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read/Write,  
Write, or password protected.  
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.  
Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low-resolution images and  
smooths their color transitions  
Image Smoothing  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher  
in resolution.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCL Emul menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item  
Font Source  
Resident  
Disk  
Notes:  
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set  
of fonts downloaded into RAM.  
Flash  
Download  
All  
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option.  
• Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be Read/Write,  
Write, or password protected.  
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded into RAM.  
• All shows all fonts available to any option.  
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored  
Notes:  
Font Name  
RO Courier  
• RO Courier is the factory default setting.  
• RO Courier shows the font name, font ID, and storage location in the  
printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K  
for Disk, and D for download.  
Symbol Set  
10U PC-8  
Specifies the symbol set for each font name  
Notes:  
12U PC-850  
• 10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting.  
• 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.  
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,  
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different  
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific  
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Point Size  
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts  
Notes:  
1.00–1008.00  
• 12 is the factory default setting.  
• Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point  
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.  
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.  
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Pitch  
0.08–100  
• 10 is the factory default setting.  
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).  
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.  
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display  
but cannot be changed.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Orientation  
Notes:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
• Portrait is the factory default setting.  
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.  
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the  
page.  
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Lines per Page  
Notes:  
1–255  
60  
64  
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default  
setting.  
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the  
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the  
desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.  
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
A4 Width  
198 mm  
203 mm  
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.  
• The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of  
eighty 10-pitch characters.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)  
after a line feed (LF) control command  
Auto CR after LF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after  
a carriage return (CR) control command  
Auto LF after CR  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use  
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders  
Tray Renumber  
Assign MP Feeder  
Off  
Notes:  
None  
0–199  
Assign Tray <x>  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• None is not an available selection. It is only displayed when it is  
selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.  
Off  
None  
0–199  
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.  
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.  
Assign Manual Paper  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Assign Man Env  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder  
Tray Renumber  
View Factory Def  
None  
Tray Renumber  
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default  
settings  
Restore Defaults  
Yes  
No  
PDF menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Scales page content to fit the selected page size  
Scale to Fit  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Yes  
Annotations  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HTML menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Intl CG Times  
Intl Courier  
Intl Univers  
Joanna MT  
Letter Gothic  
Lubalin Gothic  
Marigold  
Sets the default font for HTML documents  
Font Name  
Albertus MT  
Antique Olive  
Apple Chancery  
Arial MT  
Note: The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do  
not specify a font.  
Avant Garde  
Bodoni  
MonaLisa Recut  
Monaco  
Bookman  
Chicago  
New CenturySbk  
New York  
Optima  
Clarendon  
Cooper Black  
Copperplate  
Coronet  
Oxford  
Palatino  
Courier  
StempelGaramond  
Taffy  
Times  
Eurostile  
Garamond  
Geneva  
TimesNewRoman  
Univers  
Gill Sans  
Goudy  
Zapf Chancery  
Helvetica  
Hoefler Text  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the default font size for HTML documents  
Notes:  
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.  
Font Size  
1–255 pt  
• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
Scales the default font for HTML documents  
Notes:  
Scale  
1–400%  
• 100% is the factory default setting.  
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Sets the page margin for HTML documents  
Margin Size  
8–255 mm  
Notes:  
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.  
• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents  
Backgrounds  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Print is the factory default setting.  
Image menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation  
Auto Fit  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.  
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images  
Invert  
On  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.  
Scaling  
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size  
Anchor Top Left  
Best Fit  
Anchor Center  
Fit Height/Width  
Fit Height  
Notes:  
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.  
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.  
Fit Width  
Sets the image orientation  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Rev Portrait  
Rev Landscape  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Authentication Mode  
Authentication disabled  
NTLM  
Specifies the authentication method  
Notes:  
• Authentication disabled is the factory default setting.  
• If “Authentication disabled” is selected, Function Access settings requiring  
user IDs or passwords are ignored.  
LDAP  
LDAP and GSSAPI  
Internal  
• For LDAP and LDAP + GSSAPI, use the printer Embedded Web Server  
interface.  
Kerberos 5  
Auto 'Log out' delay  
Sets a delay in seconds at the home screen before an authenticated user is  
automatically logged off  
1–60  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Used by the system support person who has a portblocking firewall between  
the printer and their users  
Scan to PC Port Range  
<none>  
Function Access  
Menus  
Enables access to the menus  
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.  
Enable  
Disable  
Function Access  
Enables access to copy functions  
Notes:  
Copy Access  
No authentication  
required  
• Enable is the factory default setting.  
• If Function Disabled is selected, the menu item does not appear on the  
display.  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
Function Access  
Enables access to the scan to fax functions  
Notes:  
Fax Access  
No authentication  
required  
• Enable is the factory default setting.  
• If Function Disabled is selected, the menu item does not appear on the  
display.  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
Enables access to the scan to e-mail functions  
Function Access  
E-mail  
No authentication  
required  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Enables access to the scan to FTP functions  
Function Access  
FTP Access  
No authentication  
required  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
Function Access  
Enables access to held jobs  
Held Jobs Access  
No authentication  
required  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
Function Access  
Enables access to Flash Drive Scan functions  
Flash Drive Scan  
Notes:  
No authentication  
required  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
• “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting Function Disabled prevents the Scan button from appearing.  
• Selecting “No authentication required” lets any user perform the scan.  
• If either “Require User ID only” or “Require User ID and Password” is  
selected, when the Scan to USB Drive button is touched, a prompt for  
authentication appears. The same prompt occurs if a function button, like  
Scan or E-mail, is touched on the home screen.  
• If Function Disabled is selected, the menu item does not appear on the  
display.  
Function Access  
Enables access to Flash Drive Print functions  
Notes:  
Flash Drive Print  
No authentication  
required  
• “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting Function Disabled causes any file on the Flash Drive to be  
unprintable. When the file is selected for printing, an unrecognized file  
screen appears. The only choice is to delete the file.  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
• Selecting “Require User ID only” or “Require User ID and Password”  
causes the authentication screen to appear when the Print button is  
touched. The user must log on before printing takes place.  
Function disabled  
• If Function Disabled is selected, the menu item does not appear on the  
display.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables access to profiles  
Function Access  
Profile Access  
No authentication required  
Require User ID only  
Require User ID and  
Password  
Function disabled  
Confidential Print  
Max Invalid PIN  
2–10  
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered before jobs  
associated with a user id are deleted  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.  
Confidential Print  
Job Expiration  
Off  
Specifies the amount of time a confidential job is held in memory before it is  
deleted  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
1 hour  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
Password Protect  
Protects access to the Supplies menu  
Supplies Menu  
Note: ”Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Accept Advanced  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Protects access to the Paper menu  
Password Protect  
Paper Menu  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Accept Advanced  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Protects access to the Reports menu  
Password Protect  
Reports  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Accept Advanced  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Protects access to the Settings menu  
Password Protect  
Settings  
Notes:  
Accept Advanced  
• “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Password only  
• Protection is not applied unless a valid password is set.  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
• The password protects the following menus: General Settings, Copy  
Settings, Fax Settings, E-mail Settings, FTP Settings, Print Settings, and  
Set Date and Time.  
• Security is protected when a password is set. If both the Advanced and  
User Passwords are set, only the Advanced Password is valid for security.  
Protects access to the Network/Ports menu  
Password Protect  
Network/Ports  
Accept Advanced  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Password Protect  
Shortcuts  
Accept Advanced  
Protects access to shortcut settings  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Password Protect  
Protects access to scan profile creation settings  
Create Scan Profile  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Accept Advanced  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Password Protect  
Protects access to embedded solutions settings  
LES configuration  
Note: “Accept Advanced Password only” is the factory default setting.  
Accept Advanced  
Password only  
Accept Advanced and  
User Passwords  
Not Protected  
Password Protect  
Protects access to password settings  
Create/Change Passwords  
Create Advanced  
Password  
Create User Password  
Create Device Lockout  
Pin  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Allows registration or registration removal for printers with an NT domain  
Password Protect  
NTLM Authentication Setup  
Register with NT Domain  
Domain Name  
Notes:  
• Domain Name—Enter the text entry for the domain name. The factory  
default for the variable domain name is <domain>. Use the virtual  
keyboard to enter the text.  
Domain PDC  
• Domain PDC Name—Enter the text entry for the domain PDC name. The  
factory default for the Domain PDC Name variable is an asterisk (*). Use  
the virtual keyboard to enter the text.  
Set Date and Time  
Menu item  
Description  
Paris  
Specifies the time zone for the fax  
Time Zone  
Prague  
Rome  
Not Set  
US Hawaii  
Note: Not Set is the factory default setting.  
Stockholm  
Vienna  
Warsaw  
US Alaska  
US Can/Pacific  
Tijuana  
Eastern Europe  
Cairo  
US Can/  
Mountain  
US Can/Central  
US Can/Eastern  
US Can/Atl  
Newfoundland  
Brasilia, Braz.  
Mid-Atlantic  
Azores  
Helsinki  
Athens  
Istanbul  
Israel  
South Africa  
Moscow  
Tehran, Iran  
Beijing, China  
Urumqi  
Cape Verde Is.  
GMT  
Ireland  
London  
Central Europe  
Amsterdam  
Berlin  
Bern  
Brussels  
Lisbon  
Aus Western  
Aus Central  
Aus Eastern  
Queensland  
Tasmania  
Northern Ter.  
New Zealand  
Korea  
Madrid  
Japan  
Menu item  
Description  
Current Date and Time  
Displays the date and time that are associated with scan, copy, fax, e-mail, and  
FTP functions  
<none>  
Year  
Specifies the year  
2003–2028  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the month  
Month  
January  
February  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
Day  
Specifies the day  
Specifies the hour  
Specifies the minute  
0–31  
Hour  
0–23  
Minute  
0–59  
DST Mode  
Automatic  
Manual  
Accommodates Daylight Savings Time changes  
Notes:  
• Automatic is the factory default setting. The time is set by the server.  
• Manual allows manual time changes.  
Daylight Savings  
Specifies whether Daylight Savings time is applicable  
Yes  
No  
Time Server  
Specifies the time server IP address  
IP  
Note: The time server must be set to None to allow permanent manual time  
and date changes.  
None  
Time Server Name  
Specifies the IP address of the time server  
<none>  
Allow NTP Broadcast  
Allows the synchronization of time among a set of distributed time servers and  
clients  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Network/Ports menu  
TCP/IP menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
TCP/IP  
Description  
Specifies the current TCP/IP address information  
Set Hostname  
Note: This is a four-field IP address.  
Address  
Netmask  
Gateway  
TCP/IP  
Configures the TCP/IP address information  
Set static IP address  
Address  
Netmask  
Gateway  
TCP/IP  
Lets you view or change the setting  
Enable DHCP  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Enable RARP  
On  
Off  
Enable BOOTP  
On  
Off  
AutoIP  
On  
Off  
Enable FTP/TFTP  
On  
Off  
HTTP Server Enabled  
On  
Off  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
TCP/IP  
Description  
Lets you view or change the setting  
WINS Server Address  
DNS Server Address  
Backup DNS Server Address  
Domain Search Order  
Restricted Server List  
MTU  
Default TTL  
DDNS  
mDNS  
Zero Configuration Name  
SLP Broadcast  
On  
Off  
LPD Timeout  
LPD Banner Page  
On  
Off  
LPD Trailer Page  
On  
Off  
LPD Carriage Return  
Conversion  
On  
Off  
IPv6 menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
Menu item  
IPv6  
Description  
Enables IPv6 in the printer  
Enable IPv6  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Yes  
No  
IPv6  
Enables the network adapter to accept the automatic IPv6 address  
configuration entries provided by a router  
Auto Configuration  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Specifies the setting  
IPv6  
Hostname  
Address  
Router Address  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
IPv6  
Description  
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer  
Enable DHCPv6  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Yes  
No  
E-mail Server Setup menu  
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP e-mail server.  
Menu item  
Description  
E-mail Server Setup  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Primary SMTP Gateway Port  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port  
E-mail Server Setup  
SMTP Timeout  
5–30  
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops  
trying to send the e-mail  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
E-mail Server Setup  
SMTP Server Authentication  
Off  
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail  
privileges  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Device Userid and password  
User ID and password  
User e-mail and password  
E-mail Server Setup  
Device Userid  
Password  
Specifies e-mail server information  
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Message  
E-mail Server Setup  
Send me a copy  
Never appears  
On by default  
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail  
Off by default  
Always On  
E-mail Server Setup  
Max e-mail size  
0–65535 kB  
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes  
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.  
E-mail Server Setup  
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size  
limit  
Size Error Message  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name,  
such as a company domain name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Limit destinations  
Notes:  
• E-mail can only be sent to the specified domain.  
• The limit is one domain.  
Defines the path name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Web Link Setup  
Server  
Note: Defines the path. For example: /directory/path  
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path  
Login  
name: * : ? < > |.  
Password  
Path  
Base file name  
Web Link  
Active NIC menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Active NIC  
Auto  
Select one network card to communicate across a network  
Standard Network  
Standard Network menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
NPA Mode  
Off  
Auto  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the size of the network input buffer  
Network Buffer  
Auto  
Notes:  
3k to <maximum size allowed>  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The value can be changed in 1k increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is  
set to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or  
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk. This menu selection  
appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective.  
Auto  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing  
data from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Mac Binary PS  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard USB menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the  
PS Smartswitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified  
in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL  
Smartswitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
NPA Mode  
On  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the size of the USB input buffer  
Notes:  
USB Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on  
the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
3k to <maximum size  
allowed>  
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1k increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save  
setting is On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Job Buffering  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Auto  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Mac Binary PS  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
NetWare menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the assigned NetWare login name  
Login Name  
<none>  
Shows the assigned NetWare print mode  
Print Mode  
PSERVER  
RPRINTER  
Specifies the assigned NetWare network number  
Network Number  
<none>  
Activate  
On  
Activates or deactivates NetWare support  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Ethernet 802.2  
Enables the Ethernet 802.2 frame type setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Ethernet 802.3  
Enables the Ethernet 802.3 frame type setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Ethernet Type II  
Enables the Ethernet Type II frame type setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Ethernet SNAP  
Enables the Ethernet Snap frame type setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of  
multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server  
Packet Burst  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
NSQ/GSQ Mode  
Sets the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
AppleTalk menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name  
View Name  
<none>  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address  
View Address  
<none>  
Activate  
Off  
Activates or deactivates AppleTalk support  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Set Zone  
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network  
<list of zones available on the  
network>  
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default  
zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.  
LexLink menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Shows the assigned LexLink nickname  
View Nickname  
<none>  
Activates or deactivates LexLink support  
Activate  
On  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Help menu  
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information  
about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all  
guidesto print all of them at one time.  
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the  
Software and Documentation CD.  
Menu item  
Description  
Print all guides  
Information guide  
Copy guide  
Prints all the guides  
Provides help in locating additional information  
Provides information about making copies and changing settings  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
E-mail guide  
Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut  
numbers, or the address book, and changing settings  
Fax guide  
FTP guide  
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut  
numbers, or the address book, and changing settings  
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server  
using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing  
settings  
Print defects guide  
Supplies guide  
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints  
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer messages  
List of status and error messages  
Answering  
The printer is answering a fax call. Wait for the message to clear.  
Bin <x> Full  
Remove the stack of paper from the specified exit bin to clear the message.  
Busy  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Calibrating  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Call complete  
A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.  
Cancel not available  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Canceling  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Change <src> to <x>  
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the  
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images.  
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size.  
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.  
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are  
specified in the control panel Paper menu.  
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.  
Check <src> guides  
The printer cannot determine the size of the paper.  
• Readjust the paper guides.  
• Check the tray configuration.  
Clearing job accounting statistics  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Close cover <x>  
Close the specified cover to clear the message.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Close door <x>  
Close the specified door.  
Connect <x>bps  
The fax is connected. Wait for the message to clear.  
Note: <x> is the baud rate per second.  
Copies  
Enter the desired number of copies.  
Defragmenting Flash DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not turn the printer off while this message appears on the display.  
Delete/Delete all/Delete all confidential jobs  
• Touch Delete Entry to delete the specified job.  
• Touch Delete All to delete all listed jobs.  
• Touch Delete All Confidential Jobs to delete all listed confidential jobs.  
Deleting  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Dialing  
A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialingappears. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?  
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard  
disk must be reformatted.  
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.  
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.  
Disk recovery x/y XX% DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not power off while the printer is attempting to recover the printer hard disk.  
Disk recovery takes place in several phases. The percentage completed during each phase appears on the display.  
Empty hole punch box  
Empty the hole punch box, and then reinsert it into the finisher. Wait for the message to clear.  
Encrypting disk x/y XX% DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not power off while the printer is encrypting the printer hard disk.  
The percentage completed appears on the display.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Enter PIN  
Enter the PIN you created in Print Properties when the confidential job was sent for printing.  
Enter PIN to lock  
Enter the PIN you created to lock the control panel and prevent menu changes.  
Error reading USB drive  
Remove the device and wait for the message to clear. The USB drive may be corrupted.  
Fax failed  
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Flushing buffer  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Formatting Disk x/y XX% DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not power off while the printer is formatting the printer hard disk.  
The percentage completed appears on the display.  
Formatting Flash DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not power off while the printer is formatting the flash memory.  
Incorrect orientation  
Change the orientation of the paper in the tray or the position of the paper guides. Make sure the print job is requesting  
the correct paper size.  
Insert hole punch box  
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher. Wait for the message to clear.  
Insert Tray <x>  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Internal System Error, Reload Bookmarks  
• Reload the bookmarks.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Internal System Error, Reload Security Certificates  
• Reload the security certificates.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Invalid Engine Code  
You need to download valid engine code for the printer.  
For information about downloading code, see the User's Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.  
Note: Engine code may be downloaded while this message appears on the display.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Invalid file format  
A file stored on the USB drive is invalid. The file extension is correct, but the file contents are not properly formatted.  
Convert files to any of the following supported file types: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, or .dcx.  
Invalid PIN  
Enter a valid PIN.  
Invalid Network Code  
You need to download valid network printing code for the internal print server. The internal print server is a hardware  
option installed inside the printer.  
Note: Network code may be downloaded while this message appears on the display.  
Job stored for delayed transmission  
The scanning completes for a delayed send fax job. Wait for the message to clear.  
Line busy  
A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.  
Load manual feeder with <x>  
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Load staples <x>  
• Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without stapling.  
• Cancel the print job.  
Load <src> with <x>  
• Load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Menus are disabled  
The printer menus are disabled. The printer settings cannot be changed from the control panel. Contact your system  
support person for help.  
Note: When menus are disabled, it is still possible to cancel a print job, print a confidential job, or print a held job.  
Network/Network <x>  
The printer is connected to the network.  
Networkindicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board. Network  
<x>indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external  
print server.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
No answer  
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.  
No dial tone  
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.  
No held jobs  
Wait for the message to clear.  
No jobs to cancel  
Wait for the message to clear.  
No recognized file types  
Either there are no files saved on the USB drive, or the files saved are not supported. Convert files to any of the  
following supported file types: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, or .dcx.  
Power Saver  
The printer is saving power while it waits for the next print job.  
• Send a job to print.  
• Touch  
to warm the printer to normal operating temperature. Afterwards, Readyappears.  
Printer locked, enter PIN to unlock  
The control panel is locked. Enter the correct PIN to unlock it.  
Printing  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Programming disk DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not turn the printer power off while Programming diskappears on the display.  
Programming flash DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not turn the printer power off while Programming flashappears on the display.  
Programming System Code DO NOT POWER OFF  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not turn the printer power off while Programming System Codeappears on the display.  
Queued for sending  
The scanning process of a fax job completed, but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or  
received. Wait for the message to clear.  
Reading USB drive DO NOT REMOVE  
Wait for the message to clear.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Ready  
The printer is ready to receive print jobs.  
Receive complete  
The printer has received an entire fax job. Wait for the message to clear.  
Receiving page <n>  
The printer receives page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page received. Wait for the message  
to clear.  
Remote Management Active DO NOT POWER OFF  
The printer settings are being configured. Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning: Do not turn the printer power off while Remote Management Activeappears on the display.  
Remove paper from all bins  
Output bins have reached their capacity. Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue  
printing.  
Remove paper from standard bin  
The standard exit bin has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the standard exit bin to clear the message and  
continue printing.  
Remove paper from bin <x>  
The specified output bin has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the specified bin to clear the message and  
continue printing.  
Replace all originals if restarting job.  
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner  
to restart the scan job.  
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the  
message.  
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from  
the ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass (flatbed)  
immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully  
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,  
or FTP.  
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and the job is restartable. The message clears. A new scan job  
containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.  
Resetting the printer  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Restore Held Jobs?  
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Restoring Factory Defaults  
Wait for the message to clear.  
When factory default settings are restored:  
• All downloaded resources in the printer memory are deleted. This includes fonts, macros, and symbol sets.  
• All settings return to the factory defaults except the Display Language setting in the Setup menu and the custom  
settings in the Serial <x>, Network, Infrared, LocalTalk, USB, and Fax menus.  
Restoring Held Job(s) x/y  
• Wait for the message to clear.  
• Touch Quit restoring to delete unrestored held jobs.  
Note: xrepresents the number of jobs being restored. yrepresents the total number of jobs to be restored.  
Scan Document Too Long  
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.  
Scanner ADF Cover Open  
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.  
Sending page <n>  
The printer sends page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Note:  
Serial <x>  
The printer is using a serial cable connection. The serial port is the active communication link.  
Set clock  
The clock is not set. This message appears if no other fax status message appears. It remains until the clock is set.  
Some held jobs were not restored  
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.  
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.  
Some held jobs will not be restored  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Standard Bin Full  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin to clear the message.  
Staples <x> empty or misfed  
Load the specified staple cartridge into the finisher to clear the message and continue stapling.  
Staples <x> low or missing  
Load the specified staple cartridge in the finisher to clear the message.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
System busy, preparing resources for job.  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Wait for the message to clear.  
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s).  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
Submitting Selection  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Tray <x> Empty  
Load paper in the tray to clear the message.  
Tray <x> Low  
Load paper in the specified tray to clear the message.  
Tray <x> Missing  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
USB/USB <x>  
The printer is using a USB cable connection. The USB port is the active communication link.  
Waiting  
The printer has received data to print, but is waiting for an End-of-Job command, a Form Feed command, or  
additional data.  
• Touch Continue to print the contents of the buffer.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
Waiting for redial  
The printer is waiting to redial the fax number. Wait for the message to clear.  
1565 Emul Error Load Emul Option  
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware  
card.  
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
31 Missing or defective <color> cartridge  
The specified toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly.  
• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.  
• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a new one.  
32 Replace unsupported <color> cartridge  
Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.  
34 Incorrect paper size, check <src>  
• Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
• Check the Print Properties settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.  
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the  
paper is large enough for the data being printed.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
34 Short paper  
• Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.  
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
• Check the Print Properties settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.  
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the  
paper is large enough for the data being printed.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature  
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.  
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit  
the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Readyappears, enable Resource Save.  
• Install additional memory.  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job  
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored  
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
38 Memory full  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
39 Page is too complex to print  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
40 <color> invalid refill, change cartridge  
Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a new one.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
50 PPDS font error  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer  
will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
51 Defective flash detected  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
52 Flash full  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.  
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.  
53 Unformatted flash detected  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require  
replacing.  
54 Serial option <x> error  
• Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port.  
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer  
and host computer.  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
54 Standard network software error  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
54 Network <x> software error  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the unsupported optional interface card or internal print server from the printer system board.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
56 Parallel port <x> disabled  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Serial port <x> disabled  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.  
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Standard USB port disabled  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 USB port <x> disabled  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
58 Too many disks installed  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the extra disks.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
58 Too many flash options installed  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the excess flash memory.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
58 Too many trays attached  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional trays.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
61 Remove defective hard disk  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Install a different hard disk before performing any operations that require a hard disk.  
62 Disk full  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the hard disk.  
• Install a larger hard disk.  
63 Unformatted disk  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Format the disk.  
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.  
80 Scheduled maintenance <x>  
Contact Customer Support, and report the message. The printer needs to have scheduled maintenance done.  
82 Replace waste toner box  
The waste toner box is full.  
1 Replace the waste toner box.  
2 Clear the paper path.  
82 Waste toner box nearly full  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Order a replacement waste toner box immediately.  
82 Waste toner box missing  
Insert the waste toner box.  
84 Black pc unit life warning  
The black photoconductor is near exhaustion.  
• When the print quality diminishes, install a new photoconductor.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
84 Color pc unit life warning  
One or more of the color photoconductors are near exhaustion.  
• When the print quality diminishes, install new cyan, magenta, and yellow photoconductors.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
84 <color> pc unit missing  
Insert the missing photoconductor(s).  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
84 Replace black pc unit  
The black photoconductor is exhausted. Install a new photoconductor.  
84 Replace color pc units  
One or more of the color photoconductors are exhausted. Install new cyan, magenta, and yellow photoconductors.  
84 Unsupported <color> pc unit  
Replace the specified photoconductor(s).  
Note: The printer has four photoconductors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The cyan, magenta, and yellow  
photoconductors must all be replaced at the same time. The black photoconductor can be replaced separately.  
88 <color> toner low  
When this message appears, the toner is low.  
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.  
• Touch Continue to clear this message and continue printing.  
88 Replace <color> toner  
The toner cartridge is exhausted. Replace the specified toner cartridge.  
200–289.yy paper jam  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.  
289 Staple error <x>  
1 Clear the jam from the specified stapler area(s).  
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.  
290-295.yy scanner jam  
Clear all original documents from the scanner.  
900–999 Service <message>  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Maintaining the printer  
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.  
Storing supplies  
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until  
you are ready to use them.  
Do not expose supplies to:  
• Direct sunlight  
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)  
• High humidity above 80%  
• Salty air  
• Corrosive gases  
• Heavy dust  
Checking the status of supplies  
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.  
Checking the status of supplies from the control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
Note: If is not on the home screen, print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies.  
Printing a menu settings page  
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the network printer (for example,192.264.263.17).  
3 Press Enter.  
The Device Status Page appears. A summary of supply levels is displayed.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Conserving supplies  
There are some settings you can change from the control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper. For  
more information, see “Supplies menu,” “Quality menu,” and “Finishing menu.”  
If you need to print several copies, you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy  
before printing the remaining copies.  
Ordering supplies  
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies  
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the  
place where you purchased the printer.  
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.  
Ordering toner cartridges  
When 88 Cyan toner low, 88 Magenta toner low, 88 Yellow toner low, or 88 Black toner low  
appears, order a new cartridge.  
When 88 Replace Cyan toner, 88 Replace Magenta toner, 88 Replace Yellow toner, or 88  
Replace Black tonerappears, you must replace the specified toner cartridge.  
The recommended toner cartridges specifically designed for the printer are:  
Part name  
Part number  
Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge  
Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge  
Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge  
Black High Yield Toner Cartridge  
X945X2CG  
X945X2MG  
X945X2YG  
X945X2KG  
Ordering photoconductors  
When 84 Black pc unit life warningor 84 color pc unit life warningappears, order replacement  
photoconductor(s).  
Part name  
Part number  
C930X72G  
C930X73G  
Single PC Unit  
3 Pack of PC Units  
Ordering staple cartridges  
When Staples <x> low or missingappears, order the specified staple cartridge. When Staples <x>  
empty or misfedor Load staples <x>appears, replace the specified staple cartridge.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
See the illustrations inside the stapler finisher door for more information.  
Part name  
Part number  
25A0013  
Staple Cartridges–3 pack (Staples G5)  
Advanced Booklet Staples  
21Z0357  
(Staples G11 and Staples G12)  
Ordering a waste toner box  
When 82 Waste toner box nearly fullappears, order a replacement waste toner box. The waste toner box  
must be replaced when 82 Replace waste toner boxappears.  
Part name  
Part number  
Waste Toner Box  
C930X76G  
Replacing supplies  
Replacing the waste toner box  
Replace the waste toner box when 82 Replace waste toner boxappears. The printer will not continue printing  
until the waste toner box is replaced.  
1
2
3
4
Waste toner box  
Door E6  
Door E  
Printhead lens cleaner  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
E6 Door tab  
1 Unpack the replacement waste toner box and accessories.  
2 Open Door E (front printer door).  
Warning: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the door open for more than 10 minutes.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Grasp the E6 Door tab, and then push the door down.  
4 Remove the old printhead lens cleaner from Door E, and then discard it.  
5 Remove the waste toner box.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Place the plastic cover over the waste toner box.  
7 Place the waste toner box in the recycling bag.  
8 Use the new printhead lens cleaner to clean the printhead lenses.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Insert the new waste toner box.  
10 Place the new printhead lens cleaner in the notches of Door E.  
11 Close Door E6.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Close Door E.  
13 Remove all paper from the printer paper path.  
Visit www.lexmark.com/recycling to learn how to recycle the waste toner box.  
Cleaning the printhead lenses  
Clean the printhead lenses when you replace the waste toner box or when you encounter print quality problems.  
1
2
3
4
Waste toner box  
Door E6  
Door E (front door)  
Printhead lens cleaner  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
E6 Door tab  
1 Open Door E (front door).  
Warning: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the door open for more than 10 minutes.  
2 Grasp the E6 Door tab, and then push the door down.  
3 Remove the waste toner box.  
4 Locate and remove the printhead lens cleaner from Door E.  
Note: If you are replacing the waste toner box, use the printhead lens cleaner that shipped with it.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Insert the padded tip of the printhead lens cleaner into the first printhead lens opening.  
6 Push the printhead lens cleaner all the way to the back of the lens, and then pull it out.  
7 Clean the remaining three printhead lenses.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Insert the waste toner box.  
9 Place the printhead lens cleaner in the notches of Door E.  
10 Close Door E6.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Close Door E.  
Replacing a photoconductor  
Replace the black photoconductor when 84 Replace black pc unitappears. Replace the cyan, magenta, and  
yellow photoconductors when 84 Replace color pc unitsappears.  
1 Open Door E (front printer door).  
Warning: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the door open for more than 10 minutes.  
2 Release the bar by pressing the E5 button located on the bottom of the E5 latch, lift the E5 latch, and then press  
the bar down.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Remove the photoconductor(s) specified on the display.  
Photoconductor color Opening name  
Black  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
4 Unpack the replacement photoconductor.  
5 Align and insert the end of the photoconductor.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Remove the tape from the top of the photoconductor.  
7 Press the button forward to insert the photoconductor while removing the casing.  
8 Lift the bar up, and then press latch E5 down so that it holds the bar in position.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Close Door E.  
Replacing a toner cartridge  
Replace the specified toner cartridge (cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) when 88 Replace <color> toner  
appears. The printer will not continue printing until the specified cartridge is replaced.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyor 88 Replace <color> tonerappears.  
2 Unpack the new cartridge, and set it near the printer.  
3 Open Door E (front printer door).  
4 Unlock the specified cartridge by turning the cartridge counterclockwise until the arrow-shaped handle points  
toward the unlock symbol.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Remove the cartridge by gently pulling it away from the printer.  
6 Align the arrow-shaped handle with the unlock symbol, and then insert the toner cartridge all the way into the  
opening.  
7 Lock the cartridge by turning the arrow-shaped cartridge handle clockwise until it points toward the lock symbol.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Close Door E.  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer  
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION: To avoid the risk of electric shock, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect  
all cables to the printer before proceeding.  
2 Remove paper from the paper support and paper exit tray.  
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.  
Warning: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.  
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to remove any ink residue that has accumulated on the paper  
exit tray.  
Warning: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.  
5 Make sure the paper support and paper exit tray are dry before beginning a new print job.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the scanner glass  
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.  
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2 Open the scanner cover.  
3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.  
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.  
5 Close the scanner cover.  
Recycling Lexmark products  
To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling:  
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Moving the printer  
If the printer location needs to change, or the printer and media handling options, like trays or finishers, need to be  
shipped to a new location, all media handling options must be removed from the printer. For shipping, pack the  
printer and media handling options securely to avoid damage.  
Before moving the printer  
CAUTION: The base printer weighs 91.2 kg (201 lb); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely. The scanner  
weighs 25 kg (55 lb); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely while it is on its scanner shelf.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:  
• Use two people to roll the printer.  
• Use two people to roll the scanner while it is on its scanner shelf.  
• Before moving the printer:  
– Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
– Disconnect all cords the cables from the printer.  
– Disconnect the connector bracket.  
– Remove all printer options.  
Warning: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.  
Moving the printer and options to another location within the office  
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:  
• Keep the printer in an upright position.  
• Move the printer using a cart that has a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Move the options  
using a cart that has a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.  
• Avoid severe jarring movements that may cause damage to the printer and options.  
Disassemble the printer, scanner, and scanner shelf before moving items on any cart. For more information, see  
“Disassembling the printer from the scanner shelf prior to the move” on page 221.  
Disassembling the printer from the scanner shelf prior to the move  
1 Turn the printer off.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Unplug the printer power cord.  
3 Remove the connector bracket.  
4 Disconnect all cables from the back of the printer and scanner.  
5 Remove any paper or specialty media from the standard exit bin.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Remove any paper or specialty media from the multipurpose feeder.  
7 Grasp the extension on the multipurpose feeder, and then fully collapse it.  
8 Push the multipurpose feeder up to close it.  
9 Move the printer from under the scanner shelf.  
CAUTION: The printer weighs 91.2 kg (201 lb); therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely.  
CAUTION: If you need to roll the scanner and its shelf elsewhere, the scanner weighs 25 kg (55 lb);  
therefore, it requires two people to roll it safely.  
Setting the printer up in a new location  
To set up your printer configuration again:  
1 Unpack all items.  
2 Select a proper location for the printer. For a basic printer, or a printer with an optional finisher, allow the following  
recommended amount of space around the printer:  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
3
4
5
50 mm (2 in.)  
825 mm (2.7 ft)  
418 mm (1.4 ft)  
100 mm (4 in.)  
1750 mm (5.8 ft)  
3 Complete the setup of the printer and scanner by completing the “Setting up the printer” chapter in the Setup  
Guide.  
4 Verify that the printer and scanner are functioning properly by printing a menu settings page.  
Shipping the printer  
If shipping the printer, the scanner, and any options, save the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a  
relocation kit. Disassemble all the items before packing. For more information, see “Disassembling the printer from  
the scanner shelf prior to the move” on page 221.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administrative support  
Adjusting the brightness of the display  
If you are having trouble reading your display, the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings..  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Brightness appears.  
6 Touch  
to decrease the brightness, or touch  
to increase the brightness.  
Brightness settings can be adjusted from 5–100 (100 is the factory default setting).  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Disabling control panel menus  
Since many people often use a printer, a support person may choose to lock the control panel menus so that the  
settings cannot be changed from the control panel.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 From the keypad, hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
4 Touch  
repeatedly until Panel Menusappears.  
5 Touch Panel Menus.  
6 Touch  
until Disableappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch Exit Config Menu.  
Adjusting Power Saver  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Timeoutsappears.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 Touch  
repeatedly until Power Saver appears.  
to decrease the time, or touch to increase the time.  
7 Touch  
The settings available range from 2–240 minutes.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Restoring the factory default settings  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Factory Defaultsappears.  
6 Touch  
until Restore Nowappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Encrypting the printer hard disk  
This functionality is available only when a printer hard disk is installed and working properly.  
Warning: All files and resources on the printer hard disk will be deleted. Resources residing in the printer flash  
memory or RAM will not be affected.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 From the keypad, hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
4 On the display, touch  
repeatedly until Disk Encryptionappears.  
5 Touch Disk Encryption.  
6 Touch Enable or Disable.  
Note: Touch Enable to enable hard disk encryption or Disable to disable hard disk encryption.  
Contents will be lost. Continue?appears.  
7 Touch Yes.  
8 Touch Exit Config Menu.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Locking the control panel menus using the Embedded Web Server  
You can use the control panel lockout functionality to create a PIN and choose specific menus to lock. Each time a  
locked menu is selected, the user will be prompted to enter the correct PIN. The PIN does not affect access through  
the Embedded Web Server.  
To lock control panel menus:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Security.  
4 Click Menu Lockout Setup.  
Locking the entire printer  
You can use the printer lockout functionality to create a PIN that must be entered in order to use the printer. When  
the printer is locked, every print job it receives will buffer to the hard disk. To print the jobs, the user must enter the  
correct PIN using the control panel.  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and working properly for the printer lockout functionality to be  
available.  
• Some data will continue to be processed while the printer is locked. Reports such as user or event logs can be  
retrieved from a locked printer.  
To lock control panel menus:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Security.  
4 Click Printer Lockout PIN.  
Modifying confidential print settings  
You can modify confidential print settings using the Embedded Web Server. You can set a maximum number of PIN  
entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.  
You can set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the designated  
time period, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.  
Note: This functionality is only available on network printers.  
To modify the confidential print settings:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Security.  
4 Click Confidential Print Setup.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supporting IPSec  
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) provides authentication and encryption at the network layer allowing all application  
and network connections over the IP protocol to be secure. IPSec can be set up between the printer and up to five  
hosts, using both IPv4 and IPv6.  
To configure IPSec using the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Network/Ports.  
4 Click IPSec.  
IPSec supports two types of authentication:  
• Shared Key Authentication—Authenticates any ASCII phrase shared among all participating host computers.  
This is the easiest way to configure when only a few host computers on the network use IPSec.  
• Certificate Authentication—Authenticates any host computer or subnet of hosts for IPSec. Each host computer  
must have a public/private key pair. Validate Peer Certificate is enabled by default, requiring each host to have  
a signed authority certificate that is installed. Each host must have its identifier in the Subject Alternate Name  
field of the signed certificate.  
Note: After a printer is configured for IPSec with a host, IPSec is required for any IP communications to take place.  
Supporting SNMPv3  
Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) allows for encrypted and authenticated network  
connections. It also lets a system support person select the desired level of security. Prior to use, at least one user  
name and password must be assigned from the settings page.  
To configure SNMPv3 through the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Network/Ports.  
4 Click SNMP.  
SNMPv3 authentication and encryption has three levels of support:  
• No authentication and no encryption  
• Authentication with no encryption  
• Authentication and encryption  
Using 802.1x authentication  
802.1x authentication allows the printer to join networks that require authentication before allowing access. 802.1x  
port authentication can be used with the WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) feature of wireless printers or print servers  
to provide WPA-Enterprise security support.  
Support for 802.1x requires the establishment of credentials for the printer, such as certificates. Certificates provide  
a way for the printer to be known to the Authentication Server (AS). The AS allows network access to wireless printers  
or print servers presenting a valid set of credentials. You can manage the credentials by using the Embedded Web  
Server.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To install and use certificates as part of the credentials:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Network/Ports.  
4 Click Certificate Management.  
To enable and configure 802.1x after installing the required certificates:  
1 Open a Web browser. In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer or print server to be protected using  
the format: http://ip_address/.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Network/Ports.  
4 Click 802.1x Authentication. If a wireless internal print server is installed in the printer, click Wireless instead.  
Creating an administrative password  
Creating an administrative password allows a system support person to password-protect printer settings. Once a  
password is created, it must be entered to access the Configuration and Reports pages of the Embedded Web  
Server. An administrative password for the Embedded Web Server must be created before Secure mode can be  
activated.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the network printer or print server IP address, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Under Other Settings, click Security.  
5 Click Create Password.  
6 Type the same password in each Password box.  
Changing this setting will cause the print server to reset.  
7 Click Submit.  
Using Secure mode  
Secure mode is a way to securely communicate over Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram  
Protocol (UDP) ports.  
Note: An administrative password for the Embedded Web Server must be created before Secure mode can be  
enabled.  
To configure Secure mode using the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the network printer or print server IP address, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Under Other Settings, click Security.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Click TCP/IP Port Access.  
6 Select the Secure Mode Active check box.  
Note: If Secure Mode Active is gray or not selectable, create an administrative password and try again.  
7 Select a setting for each listed port, and then click Submit.  
There are three ways to configure the TCP and UDP network ports:  
• Disabled—Port is disabled and never allows network connections  
• Secure and Unsecure—Port is always open including when the printer is in Secure mode  
• Unsecured Only—Port is open only when printer is in Secure mode  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Checking an unresponsive printer  
If your printer is not responding, make sure:  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) has not tripped.  
From the back of the printer, press the GFCI Reset button located above the printer power cord.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
• The printer is turned on.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem.  
Door A will not shut properly  
Make sure the green paper jam clearance lever behind Door A is in place:  
1 Press down on the white release lever beneath Door A at the top of the printer, and then open the door.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 Press the A1 green lever down to its normal position.  
3 Close Door A.  
Solving printing problems  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print  
The documents contain unavailable fonts.  
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.  
2 Click the printer icon.  
The Print dialog appears.  
3 Select Print as image.  
4 Click OK.  
Control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds  
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.  
If Performing Self Testand Readydo not appear, turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears  
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices,  
visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Make sure the printer is ready to print  
Make sure Readyor Power Saverappears on the display before sending a job to print.  
Check to see if the standard exit bin is full  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Check to see if the paper tray is empty  
Load paper in the tray.  
Make sure the correct printer software is installed  
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.  
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,  
or Windows 2000/Me/98 and using compatible printer software.  
Make sure the internal print server is installed properly and working  
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.  
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check  
the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to  
make sure the network is functioning correctly.  
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Make sure you are using a recommended USB, serial, or Ethernet cable  
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Make sure printer cables are securely connected  
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.  
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Has a formatting error occurred?  
If so, delete the job and try printing it again. Only part of the job may print.  
Make sure the printer has sufficient memory  
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.  
Check to see if the printer has received invalid data  
Delete invalid jobs.  
Job takes longer than expected to print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Reduce the complexity of the print job  
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.  
Change the Page Protect setting to Off  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Print Recovery appears.  
6 Touch  
until Off appears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Incorrect characters print  
Cause  
Solution  
Printer is in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hexappears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace mode before you  
can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.  
Tray linking does not work  
Are the same size and type of paper loaded in each tray?  
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray.  
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.  
Are the Paper Size and Paper Type settings the same for each tray?  
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.  
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper  
Size/Type menu.  
Large jobs do not collate  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Make sure Collate is set to On  
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.  
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.  
Reduce the complexity of the print job  
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of  
images, and the number of pages in the job.  
Make sure the printer has enough memory  
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.  
Unexpected page breaks occur  
Increase the Print Timeout value:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 Touch Settings.  
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Timeoutsappears.  
6 Touch Timeouts.  
7 Touch the  
next to Print Timeout repeatedly until the desired value appears.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Solving copy problems  
Copier does not respond  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Are there any error messages on the display?  
Clear any error messages.  
Check the power  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Scanner unit does not close  
Make sure there are no obstructions:  
1 Lift the scanner unit.  
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.  
3 Lower the scanner unit.  
Poor copy quality  
These are some examples of poor copy quality:  
• Blank pages  
• Checkerboard pattern  
• Distorted graphics or pictures  
• Missing characters  
• Faded print  
• Dark print  
• Skewed lines  
• Smudges  
• Streaks  
• Unexpected characters  
• White lines in print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Are there any error messages on the display?  
Clear any error messages.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Is the toner low?  
When 88 <color> Toner Lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge(s).  
Is the scanner glass dirty?  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.  
Is the copy too light or too dark?  
Adjust the density of the copy.  
Check the quality of the original document  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
Check the document placement  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Unwanted toner is in the background  
• Increase the background removal setting.  
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.  
Patterns (moiré) appear in the output  
• On the copy screen, touch the Text/Photo or Printed Image icon.  
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.  
• On the copy screen, adjust the scale setting.  
Black text is light or disappearing  
• On the copy screen, touch the Text icon.  
• Decrease the background removal setting.  
• Increase the contrast setting.  
• Decrease the shadow detail setting.  
The output appears washed out or overexposed  
• On the copy screen, touch the Printed Image icon.  
• Decrease the background removal setting.  
Partial document or photo copies  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the document placement  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Check the Paper Size setting  
Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solving scanner problems  
Checking an unresponsive scanner  
If your scanner is not responding, make sure:  
• The three cables located on the back of the scanner are attached to the printer securely.  
• The printer is turned on.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem  
with the scanner.  
Scan was not successful  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the cable connections  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
An error may have occurred in the program  
Turn off and then restart the computer.  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Do you have any other software programs running?  
Close all programs not being used.  
The scan resolution may be set too high  
Select a lower scan resolution.  
Poor scanned image quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Are there any error messages on the display?  
Clear any error messages.  
Is the scanner glass dirty?  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.  
Adjust the scan resolution  
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.  
Check the quality of the original document  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Check the document placement  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Partial document or photo scans  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the document placement  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Check the Paper Size setting  
Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Cannot scan from a computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Are there any error messages on the display?  
Clear any error messages.  
Check the power  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Check the cable connections  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
Solving fax problems  
Caller ID is not shown  
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.  
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings  
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends  
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company  
to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.  
Cannot send or receive a fax  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Are there any error messages on the display?  
Clear any error messages.  
Check the power  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Check the printer connections  
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:  
• Telephone  
• Handset  
• Answering machine  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Check the telephone wall jack  
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.  
2 Listen for a dial tone.  
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, plug a different telephone into the wall jack.  
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, plug a telephone into a different wall jack.  
5 If you hear a dial tone, connect the printer to that wall jack.  
Review this digital phone service checklist  
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services  
can be used.  
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)  
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN  
provider.  
• If you are using DSL, connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact  
your DSL provider.  
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.  
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.  
Is there a dial tone?  
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.  
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.  
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.  
Temporarily disconnect other equipment  
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering  
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.  
Check for jams  
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.  
Temporarily disable Call Waiting  
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone  
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.  
Do you have Voice Mail service?  
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail  
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.  
Is the printer memory full?  
1 Dial the fax number.  
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Can send but not receive faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Is there paper in the paper tray(s)?  
Make sure paper is loaded in the tray(s).  
Check the ring count delay settings  
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers in Fax Only or Fax  
Tel modes. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's  
Distinctive Ring service, keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.  
7 Click Submit.  
Is the toner low?  
88 <color> toner lowappears when the toner is low.  
Can receive but not send faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Is the printer in Fax mode?  
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.  
Is the document loaded properly?  
Load the original document faceup, short-edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left  
corner.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Make sure the shortcut number is set up properly  
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.  
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.  
Received fax has poor print quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Can the document be re-sent?  
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:  
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.  
Is the toner low?  
When 88 <color> toner lowappears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge(s).  
Make sure the fax transmission speed is not set too high  
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
7 Click Submit.  
Blocking junk faxes  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer and, then press Enter.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
6 Click the No Name Fax option.  
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.  
7 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to  
block.  
Solving option problems  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Reset the printer  
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Check to see if the option is connected to the printer  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the printer.  
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.  
Make sure the option is installed  
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not  
listed, reinstall it.  
Make sure the option is selected  
From the program you are using, select the option. Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the  
Chooser.  
Drawers  
Make sure the paper is loaded correctly  
1 Open the paper tray.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.  
5 Close the door.  
Reset the printer  
Turn the printer off. Wait 10 seconds. Turn the printer back on.  
Finisher  
If the finisher does not operate correctly, these are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Make sure the connection between the finisher and the printer is secure  
If the finisher is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it exits the printer and enters the finisher, it  
may not be properly installed. Reinstall the finisher. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation  
that shipped with the finisher.  
Make sure you are using a paper size that is compatible with the finisher exit bins  
For more information about supported paper sizes, click View User's Guide and Documentation on the Software  
and Documentation CD.  
Flash memory card  
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Hard disk with adapter  
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Internal print server  
If the internal print server does not operate correctly, these are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the print server connections  
• Make sure the internal print server is securely attached to the printer system board.  
• Make sure you are using the correct (optional) cable and that it is securely connected.  
Make sure the network software is configured correctly  
For information about installing software for network printing, click View User's Guide and Documentation on the  
Software and Documentation CD.  
Memory card  
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
USB/parallel interface card  
Check the USB/parallel interface card connections:  
• Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.  
Solving paper feed problems  
Paper frequently jams  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the paper  
Use recommended paper and other specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
Make sure there is not too much paper in the paper tray  
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the  
multipurpose feeder.  
Check the paper guides  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Has the paper absorbed moisture due to high humidity?  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared  
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then press  
.
Print jobs are not routed to the booklet-maker bin  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the paper  
Make sure the paper is loaded in a 520-sheet tray or the multipurpose feeder. If the paper is loaded in the  
multipurpose feeder, make sure it is loaded short-edge first.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note: Do not load A4- or letter-size paper in the multipurpose feeder.  
Is the letter- or A4-size paper loaded in a 520-sheet tray?  
The finisher will not accept letter- or A4-size paper from the multipurpose feeder. Load letter- or A4-size paper in  
the short-edge orientation in a 520-sheet tray.  
Make sure the paper size is supported by the booklet-maker bin (Bin 2)  
Use one of the following paper sizes supported by Bin 2: A3, A4, B4, folio, legal, letter, or tabloid (11 x 17 in.).  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam  
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch  
repeatedly until Print Recoveryappears.  
6 Touch Print Recovery.  
7 Touch next to Jam Recovery until Onor Autoappears.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solving print quality problems  
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not  
correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.  
Isolating print quality problems  
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Load letter- or A4-size paper in the tray in the long-edge orientation.  
3 From the keypad, hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 On the display, touch  
repeatedly until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
7 Touch Exit Config Menu.  
Blank pages  
The printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Characters have jagged or uneven edges  
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the  
software program.  
Clipped images  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the paper guides  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Check the Paper Size setting  
Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Dark lines  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
One or more of the photoconductors may be defective.  
If an 84 Color pc unit life warning, 84 Black pc unit life warning, 84 Replace color pc  
units, or 84 Replace black pc unitmessage appears, replace the photoconductor(s).  
Gray background  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Reduce the Toner Darkness setting  
From Print Properties, select a different Toner Darkness setting before sending the job to print.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Incorrect margins  
Check the paper guides  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Check the Paper Size setting  
Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Check the Page size setting  
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct page size in Print Properties or the software program.  
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Clean the printhead lenses  
The printhead lenses may be dirty.  
Is a toner cartridge defective?  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Are the photoconductors defective?  
Replace the photoconductor(s).  
Note: The printer has four photoconductors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The cyan, magenta, and yellow  
photoconductors must all be replaced at the same time. The black photoconductor can be replaced separately.  
Is the transfer belt defective?  
Replace the transfer belt.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper curl  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Has the paper absorbed moisture due to high humidity?  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Print irregularities  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Has paper absorbed moisture due to high humidity?  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Check the paper  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
Is the toner low?  
When 88 <color> toner lowappears or when you experience faded print, you may be able to extend the life  
of the toner cartridge:  
1 Remove the toner cartridge.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute toner.  
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge and continue printing.  
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the toner cartridge.  
Is the fuser worn or defective?  
Replace the fuser.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repeating defects  
Do marks occur repeatedly only in one color and multiple times on a page?  
Replace the photoconductor(s) if the defects occur every:  
• 44 mm (1.7 in.)  
• 94 mm (3.7 in.)  
Note: The printer has four photoconductors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The cyan, magenta, and yellow  
photoconductors must all be replaced at the same time. The black photoconductor can be replaced separately.  
Skewed print  
Check the paper guides  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Check the paper  
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.  
Print is too light  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the darkness, brightness, and contrast settings  
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the RGB Brightness setting is too dark, or the RGB Contrast setting is too  
high.  
• From Print Properties, change these settings.  
Note: This solution applies to Windows users only.  
• From the Quality menu, change these settings.  
Has the paper absorbed moisture due to high humidity?  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Check the paper  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Make sure Color Saver is set to Off  
Color Saver may be set to On.  
Is the toner low?  
When 88 <color> toner lowappears order a new cartridge.  
A toner cartridge may be defective  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Print is too dark  
Check the darkness, brightness, and contrast settings  
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the RGB Brightness setting is too dark, or the RGB Contrast setting is too  
high.  
• From Print Properties, change these settings.  
Note: This solution applies to Windows users only.  
• From the Quality menu, change these settings.  
Is the toner cartridge defective?  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Solid color pages  
The printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page  
A toner cartridge may be defective  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Are the photoconductors worn or defective?  
Replace the photoconductor(s).  
Note: The printer has four photoconductors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The cyan, magenta, and yellow  
photoconductors must all be replaced at the same time. The black photoconductor can be replaced separately.  
Is there toner in the paper path?  
Contact Customer Support.  
Toner rubs off  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Check the Paper Texture setting  
Make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Toner specks  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Is a toner cartridge defective?  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Is there toner in the paper path?  
Contact Customer Support.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transparency print quality is poor  
Check the transparencies  
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
Check the Paper Type setting  
Load transparencies, and make sure the Paper Type setting is set to Transparency.  
Uneven print density  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Replace the photoconductor(s).  
Note: The printer has four photoconductors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The cyan, magenta, and yellow  
photoconductors must all be replaced at the same time. The black photoconductor can be replaced separately.  
Solving color quality problems  
This section helps answer some basic color-related questions and describes how some of the features provided in  
the Quality menu can be used to solve typical color problems.  
FAQ about color printing  
What is RGB color?  
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed  
in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors  
create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green,  
or blue needed to produce a certain color.  
What is CMYK color?  
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of  
colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet  
printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by  
indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.  
How is color specified in a document to be printed?  
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they  
allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program  
Help topics.  
How does the printer know what color to print?  
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The  
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts  
of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines  
the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table  
to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?  
The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver  
provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.  
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?  
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard  
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there  
are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on  
how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color-matching problems, see the question,  
“How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”  
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?  
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be  
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust  
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to  
make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative  
values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the  
amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both  
magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.  
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?  
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain  
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector  
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to  
print on the recommended type of color transparencies.  
What is manual color correction?  
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process  
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be  
implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or  
images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).  
Notes:  
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK  
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating  
system controls the adjustment of colors.  
• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred  
colors for the majority of documents.  
To manually apply a different color conversion table:  
1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.  
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the  
affected object type.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Color menu  
Object type  
Color conversion tables  
RGB Image  
RGB Text  
• Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be  
applied to all incoming color formats.  
• sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the  
colors displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is  
optimized for printing photographs.  
RGB Graphics  
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates  
the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black  
toner to create all levels of neutral gray.  
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the  
sRGB Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for  
printing business graphics.  
• Off—No color correction is implemented.  
CMYK Image  
CMYK Text  
• US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP  
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.  
• Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated  
EuroScale color output.  
CMYK Graphics  
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK  
color correction setting.  
• Off—No color correction is implemented.  
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?  
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the  
Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page printout  
consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending  
on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination  
labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.  
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The  
color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program.  
For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize  
the selected color conversion table for the particular object.  
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color Correction  
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the  
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color  
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is  
implemented.  
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK  
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system  
adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed  
color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.  
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?  
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed  
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-defined RGB  
or CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK  
Increment box.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the network printer IP address.  
3 Click Configuration.  
4 Click Color Samples.  
5 Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range.  
6 When the Detailed Options page appears, select a color conversion table.  
7 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.  
8 Enter an Increment value from 1–255.  
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.  
9 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set.  
Contacting Customer Support  
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the  
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.  
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top  
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.  
In the U.S. or Canada, call (1-800-539-6275). For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
Product name:  
Lexmark X940e, Lexmark X945e  
Machine type:  
7510  
Model(s):  
030, 230  
Edition notice  
April 2007  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK  
INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this  
statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein;  
these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made  
at any time.  
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in  
all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product,  
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual  
property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,  
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.  
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.  
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.  
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
Bldg 004-2/CSC  
740 New Circle Road NW  
Lexington, KY 40550  
© 2007 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS  
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and  
documentation developed exclusively at private expense.  
Trademarks  
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.  
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer  
commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language.  
This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions  
corresponding to the commands.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Conventions  
Note: A Note identifies something that could help you.  
Warning: A Warning identifies something that could damage your product hardware or software.  
CAUTION: A CAUTION identifies something that could cause you harm.  
CAUTION: This type of CAUTION indicates that you should not touch the marked area.  
CAUTION: This type of CAUTION indicates a hot surface.  
CAUTION: This type of CAUTION indicates a shock hazard.  
CAUTION: This type of CAUTION indicates a tipping hazard.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information  
statement  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in  
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own  
expense.  
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to  
operate this equipment.  
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device, use a properly  
shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute  
cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
The following notice is applicable if your printer has a wireless network card installed.  
The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches)  
must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC.  
Industry Canada notices  
Industry Canada compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des  
interférences NMB-003.  
Industry Canada radio interference statement  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation  
of the device.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations  
of Industry Canada.  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide  
maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of  
Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/  
rpb.  
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :  
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles risquant d'altérer  
son fonctionnement.  
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite  
par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.  
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement interdite.  
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et loin des fenêtres  
afin de garantir une protection optimale.  
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.  
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre aucun champ HF  
dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez  
consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux spécifications  
techniques d'Industry Canada.  
Radio interference notice  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case, the user may be required  
to take adequate measures.  
European Community (EC) directives conformity  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 89/336/EEC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the  
approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment  
designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support,  
Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.  
This product satisfies the limits of EN 55022; safety requirements of EN 60950; radio spectrum requirements of ETSI EN 300 330-1 and  
ETSI EN 300 330-2; and the EMC requirements of EN 55024, ETSI EN 301 489-1 and ETSI EN 301 489-3.  
Česky  
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky  
a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
Dansk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i  
direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Deutsch  
Ελληνική  
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden  
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.  
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ  
ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
English  
Español  
Eesti  
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements  
and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y  
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.  
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja  
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.  
Suomi  
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden  
sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.  
Français  
Magyar  
Íslenska  
Italiano  
Latviski  
Lietuvių  
Malti  
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales  
et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az  
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.  
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar  
eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle  
altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem  
ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos  
nuostatas.  
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma  
dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.  
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en  
de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
Norsk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige  
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Polski  
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz  
pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.  
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras  
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.  
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia  
smernice 1999/5/ES.  
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili  
direktive 1999/5/ES.  
Svenska  
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav  
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.  
India emissions notice  
This device uses very low power low range RF communication that has been tested and found not to cause any interference whatsoever.  
The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any disputes arising out of requirement of permissions from any local authority, regulatory  
bodies or any organization, required by the end-user to install and operate this product at his premises.  
Noise emission levels  
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA  
Printing  
Scanning  
Copying  
Ready  
52 dBA  
54 dBA  
53 dBA  
32 dBA  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Temperature information  
Ambient temperature  
15.6C° – 32.2C°  
-40.0C° – 60.0C°  
Shipping and storage temperature  
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive  
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We  
encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.  
Product disposal  
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and  
recycling options.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information  
statement  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal  
Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format  
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.  
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC  
Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is  
designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive  
RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of  
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total  
RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product  
identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03  
is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance  
of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You  
will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this  
equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to  
maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at  
www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company  
may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the  
previous paragraph for contact information.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or  
corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not  
disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a  
qualified installer.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment  
connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install  
an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one  
that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a  
recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning  
strikes and other electrical surges.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including  
fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  
on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual  
sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone  
number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of  
the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem  
REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment  
connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install  
an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one  
that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a  
recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning  
strikes and other electrical surges.  
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.  
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada  
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro  
d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés à l’interface téléphonique.  
En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils  
ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.  
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre, entraînent d'importants  
dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En  
conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté.  
Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL  
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de  
certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres  
surtensions électriques.  
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network  
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment  
indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no  
endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will  
work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product  
is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.  
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.  
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this  
device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:  
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation,  
and  
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the  
next call attempt.  
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds  
between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
South Africa telecommunications notice  
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.  
Using this product in Switzerland  
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives  
metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in  
Switzerland.  
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse  
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou 80D1877) devant  
être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute installation car ces  
impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.  
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz  
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder  
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die Verwendung des Lexmark  
Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.  
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera  
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono  
impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in  
Svizzera.  
ENERGY STAR  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Laser notice  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and  
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 5  
milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 770-795 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there  
is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service  
condition.  
Laser advisory label  
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:  
Power consumption  
Product power consumption  
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Mode  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
Printing  
Copying  
Scanning  
Ready  
The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.  
850 W  
The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents. 850 W  
The product is scanning hard-copy documents.  
The product is waiting for a print job.  
240 W  
220 W  
45 W  
NA  
Power Saver  
High Off  
The product is in energy-saving mode.  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.  
Low Off (<1 W Off) The product is plugged into a wall outlet, the power switch is turned off, and the NA  
product is in the lowest possible power consumption mode.  
Off  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.  
110V = 0.15W, 220V = 1.25W  
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be  
substantially higher than the average.  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Power Saver  
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the EPA Sleep Mode.  
The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is  
automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Power Saver Timeout.  
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes):  
110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes  
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting the Power  
Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Power Saver  
Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.  
Off mode  
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption,  
disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Total energy usage  
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts,  
the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total  
product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.  
Statement of Limited Warranty  
Lexmark X940e, Lexmark X945e  
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY  
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty  
information that came with your product.  
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark  
Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”  
Limited warranty  
Lexmark warrants that this product:  
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts  
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship  
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at  
Lexmark's option).  
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was  
intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.  
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder  
of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.  
Limited warranty service  
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that  
the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents,  
are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.  
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to  
the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of,  
or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.  
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark.  
The replacement may be a new or repaired item.  
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.  
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty  
service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.  
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless  
directed otherwise by Lexmark).  
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the  
World Wide Web at www.lexmark.com/support.  
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark  
warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.  
Extent of limited warranty  
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any  
product.  
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:  
—Modification or unauthorized attachments  
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance  
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer  
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle  
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications  
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts  
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR  
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH  
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY  
NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES  
ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.  
Limitation of liability  
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of  
Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the  
following paragraph.  
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the  
damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property  
for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS,  
INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a  
Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.  
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and  
Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.  
Additional rights  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
84 Black pc unit life warning 201  
84 color pc unit life warning 201  
84 Replace black pc unit 202  
84 Replace color pc units 202  
84 Unsupported <color> pc unit 202  
867-sheet tray  
Change <src> to <x> 190  
Check <src> guides 190  
checking an unresponsive printer 231  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 237  
Numerics  
1133-sheet tray  
loading 37  
1565 Emul Error Load Emul  
Option 197  
200–289.yy paper jam 202  
289 Staple error <x> 202  
290-295.yy scanner jam 202  
31 Missing or defective <color>  
cartridge 197  
32 Replace unsupported <color>  
cartridge 197  
34 Incorrect paper size 197  
34 Short paper 198  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 198  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment operation 198  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 198  
cleaning  
loading 37  
exterior of the printer 219  
printhead lenses 205, 210  
scanner glass 220  
Clearing job accounting statistics 190  
Close cover<x> 190  
Close door <x> 191  
collating copies 60  
color documents  
e-mailing 69  
confidential jobs  
modifying print settings 227  
Confidential print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
configurations  
88 <color> toner low 202  
88 Replace <color> toner 202  
900–999 Service <message> 202  
Symbols  
“scan to computer” screen  
options 96, 97  
A
Active NIC menu 184  
address book, e-mail  
setting up 67  
address book, fax  
using 86  
ADF  
copying using 55  
Answering 190  
AppleTalk menu 188  
attaching cables 32  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs  
will not be restored 198  
38 Memory full 198  
39 Page is too complex to print 198  
40 <color> invalid refill, change  
cartridge 198  
printer 17  
Configure MP menu 128  
Connect <x>bps 191  
connecting fax  
using RJ11 adapter 75  
connecting the printer to  
answering machine 80  
computer modem 81  
telephone 79  
telephone wall jack in Germany 78  
conserving supplies 204  
contacting Customer Support 255  
contrast, adjusting 225  
control panel 19  
disabling hard disk encryption 226  
disabling menus 225  
enabling menus 225  
encrypting hard disk 226  
factory defaults, restoring 226  
locking menus 225, 227  
unlocking menus 225  
Copies 191  
copy quality  
adjusting 59  
improving 66  
copy screen  
color 64  
options 63, 64  
photo 64  
Copy Settings menu 141  
copy troubleshooting  
copier does not respond 235  
partial document or photo  
copies 236  
50 PPDS font error 199  
51 Defective flash detected 199  
52 Flash full 199  
520-sheet tray (standard or optional)  
loading 34  
B
Bin <x> Full 190  
Bin Setup menu 133  
black and white  
printing 105  
brightness, adjusting 225  
Busy 190  
buttons, control panel 19  
buttons, home screen 20  
buttons, touch screen 22  
53 Unformatted flash detected 199  
54 Network <x> software error 199  
54 Serial option <x> error 199  
54 Standard network software  
error 199  
55 Unsupported option in slot 199  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 200  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 200  
56 Standard USB port disabled 200  
56 USB port <x> disabled 200  
57 Configuration change, held jobs  
were not restored 200  
58 Too many disks installed 200  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 200  
58 Too many trays attached 200  
61 Remove defective hard disk 201  
62 Disk full 201  
C
cables  
Ethernet 32  
scanner 32  
USB 32  
Calibrating 190  
Call complete 190  
calling Customer Support 255  
Cancel not available 190  
Canceling 190  
canceling a job  
from Mac OS 9 104  
from Mac OSX 104  
from the control panel 104  
from Windows desktop 104  
from Windows taskbar 104  
card stock  
63 Unformatted disk 201  
80 Scheduled maintenance<x> 201  
802.1x authentication 228  
82 Replace waste toner box 201  
82 Waste toner box missing 201  
82 Waste toner box nearly full 201  
84 <color> pc unit missing 201  
guidelines 48  
loading 38  
poor copy quality 235  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
poor scanned image quality 237  
scanner unit does not close 235  
copying  
adding a date and time stamp 62  
adding an overlay message 63  
adjusting quality 59  
canceling a copy job 63  
collating copies 60  
custom job (job build) 61  
document containing mixed paper  
sizes 58  
fax screen  
advanced options 89  
options 88  
E
Embedded Web Server  
administrative password 229  
locking control panel menus 227  
locking entire printer 227  
modifying confidential print  
settings 227  
fax troubleshooting  
blocking junk faxes 241  
caller ID is not shown 238  
can receive but not send faxes 240  
can send but not receive faxes 240  
cannot send or receive a fax 238  
received fax has poor print  
quality 240  
supporting IPSec 228  
supporting SNMPv3 228  
using 802.1x authentication 228  
using Secure mode 229  
emission notices 257, 258, 259  
Empty hole punch box 191  
enabling  
control panel menus 225  
Encrypting disk x/y XX% 191  
enlarging a copy 59  
Enter PIN 192  
Enter PIN to lock 192  
envelopes  
guidelines 47  
loading 38  
Error reading USB drive 192  
Ethernet port 32  
enlarging 59  
faxing  
from one size to another 57  
improving copy quality 66  
making transparencies 56  
multiple pages on one sheet 60  
on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 58  
photos 56  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 60  
quick copy 55  
reducing 59  
selecting a tray 57  
to letterhead 56  
canceling a fax job 87, 88  
changing resolution 86  
choosing a fax connection 74  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 84  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 85  
forwarding faxes 90  
holding faxes 89  
improving fax quality 89  
making a fax lighter or darker 86  
sending a fax at a scheduled time 87  
sending using the computer 84  
sending using the control panel 84  
setting the date and time 83  
setting the outgoing fax name and  
number 83  
exterior of the printer  
cleaning 219  
e-mail  
canceling 71  
e-mail function  
using the ADF 55  
using the scanner glass (flatbed) 56  
Custom Bin Names menu 132  
Custom Names menu 131  
custom paper type  
assigning 42  
Custom Type <x>  
turning daylight saving time on or  
off 83  
using shortcuts 85  
setting up 67  
e-mail screen  
advanced options 72  
options 71, 72  
E-mail Server Setup menu 154, 183  
E-mail Settings menu 151  
e-mailing  
adding message line 70  
adding subject line 70  
changing output file type 71  
color documents 69  
creating a profile 70  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 68  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 68  
setting up address book 67  
setting up e-mail function 67  
to a profile 70  
using shortcut numbers 69  
using the address book 69  
using the keypad 68  
changing name 42  
Custom Types menu 131  
using the address book 86  
viewing a fax log 87  
FCC notices 257, 260  
finisher  
finishing features 51  
supported paper sizes 51  
troubleshooting 242  
Finishing menu 161  
firmware card  
D
date and time  
setting 83  
Default Source menu 126  
Defragmenting Flash 191  
Delete 191  
Delete all 191  
Delete all confidential jobs 191  
Deleting 191  
Dialing 191  
directory list, printing 103  
disabling  
control panel menus 225  
Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 191  
Disk recovery x/y XX% 191  
display troubleshooting  
display is blank 232  
display shows only diamonds 232  
display, control panel 19  
adjusting brightness and  
contrast 225  
documents, printing  
from Macintosh 99  
from Windows 99  
duplexing 58  
installing 29  
flash memory card  
installing 29  
troubleshooting 242  
Flushing buffer 192  
Formatting Disk x/y XX% 192  
Formatting Flash 192  
forwarding faxes 90  
FTP  
address book 92  
FTP quality, improving 94  
FTP screen  
F
advanced options 94  
options 93  
FTP Settings menu 155  
factory defaults, restoring  
control panel menus 226  
FAQ about color printing 252  
Fax failed 192  
G
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)  
menu 143  
Fax Mode (Fax Server) menu 150  
fax quality, improving 89  
guidelines  
card stock 48  
envelopes 47  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
labels 47  
letterhead 45  
transparencies 46  
stapler 119  
Paper Loading 130  
Paper Size/Type 126  
Paper Texture 129  
PCL Emul 170  
job interrupt 62  
Job stored for delayed  
transmission 193  
H
PDF 172  
PostScript 169  
Quality 164  
Reports 134  
Scan to USB Settings 158  
Security 175  
Set Date and Time 179  
Settings 136  
L
hard disk  
disabling encryption 226  
enabling encryption 226  
hard disk with adapter  
troubleshooting 242  
held jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
Held jobs were not restored 196  
Help menu 188  
labels  
guidelines 47  
letterhead  
copying to 56  
guidelines 45  
LexLink menu 188  
light, indicator 19  
Line busy 193  
linking trays 41  
Load <src> with <x> 193  
Load manual feeder with <x> 193  
Load staples 193  
loading  
Setup 167  
Standard Network 184  
Standard USB 186  
Substitute Size 129  
Supplies 125  
TCP/IP 180  
Utilities 166  
holding faxes 89  
home screen  
buttons 20  
HTML menu 173  
1133-sheet tray 37  
520-sheet tray (standard or  
optional) 34  
867-sheet tray 37  
card stock 38  
Menus are disabled 193  
moving the printer  
disassembling printer from scanner  
shelf 221  
guidelines before moving 220  
guidelines to avoid personal  
injury 220  
guidelines to avoid printer  
damage 220  
precautions 221  
setting the printer up in a new  
location 223  
shipping to another location 224  
to another location within the  
office 221  
I
Image menu 174  
Incorrect orientation 192  
Insert hole punch box 192  
Insert Tray <x> 192  
installing printer software 99  
internal print server  
installing 30  
troubleshooting 243  
Internal System Error, Reload  
Bookmarks 192  
envelopes 38  
multipurpose feeder 38  
transparencies 38  
locking  
control panel menus 225, 227  
entire printer 227  
M
Internal System Error, Reload Security  
Certificates 192  
max speed and max yield  
printing 105  
Invalid Engine Code 192  
Invalid file format 193  
Invalid Network Code 193  
Invalid PIN 193  
memory card  
installing 28  
troubleshooting 243  
menu settings page, printing 103, 203  
menus  
using a cart 221  
multiple pages on one sheet 60  
multipurpose feeder  
loading 38  
IPSec 228  
N
IPv6 menu 182  
Active NIC 184  
AppleTalk 188  
NetWare menu 187  
Network 193  
Network <x> 193  
network setup page 103  
No answer 194  
No dial tone 194  
J
Bin Setup 133  
jams  
Configure MP 128  
Copy Settings 141  
Custom Bin Names 132  
Custom Names 131  
Custom Types 131  
Default Source 126  
diagram of 124  
E-mail Server Setup 154, 183  
E-mail Settings 151  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 143  
Fax Mode (Fax Server) 150  
Finishing 161  
FTP Settings 155  
Help 188  
HTML 173  
Image 174  
IPv6 182  
avoiding 106  
locating doors and trays 106  
locations 106  
numbers 106  
jams, clearing  
200–203 108  
230–231 108  
241 111  
242–244 112  
250 114  
280–282 115  
283 116  
No held jobs 194  
No jobs to cancel 194  
No recognized file types 194  
noise emission levels 259  
notices 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261,  
262, 263, 264  
O
options  
firmware card 29  
firmware cards 27  
flash memory card 29  
internal 27  
284 116  
284–286 118  
287 116  
288 116  
289 119  
290–295 122  
LexLink 188  
NetWare 187  
internal print server 30  
memory card 28  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
memory cards 27  
port interface card 30  
options, touch-screen  
copy 63, 64  
e-mail 71, 72  
fax 88, 89  
FTP 93, 94  
scan to computer 96, 97  
ordering  
photoconductors 204  
staple cartridges 204  
toner cartridges 204  
waste toner box 205  
output file type  
canceling from Mac OSX 104  
canceling from Windows  
desktop 104  
canceling from Windows taskbar 104  
print quality  
cleaning the printhead lenses 210  
cleaning the scanner glass 220  
replacing photoconductor(s) 214  
replacing the waste toner box 205  
print quality test pages, printing 103  
print quality troubleshooting  
blank pages 245  
32 Replace unsupported <color>  
cartridge 197  
34 Incorrect paper size 197  
34 Short paper 198  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 198  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment operation 198  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 198  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 198  
38 Memory full 198  
characters have jagged edges 246  
clipped images 246  
dark lines 246  
39 Page is too complex to print 198  
40 <color> invalid refill, change  
cartridge 198  
changing 71  
gray background 246  
P
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line 247  
poor transparency quality 252  
print irregularities 248  
print is too dark 250  
50 PPDS font error 199  
51 Defective flash detected 199  
52 Flash full 199  
paper  
A5 36  
characteristics 43  
finishing features 51  
letterhead 44  
preprinted forms 44  
recycled 44  
selecting 44  
setting size 34  
setting type 34  
statement 36  
53 Unformatted flash detected 199  
54 Network <x> software error 199  
54 Serial option <x> error 199  
54 Standard network software  
error 199  
55 Unsupported option in slot 199  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 200  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 200  
56 Standard USB port disabled 200  
56 USB port <x> disabled 200  
57 Configuration change, held jobs  
were not restored 200  
58 Too many disks installed 200  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 200  
58 Too many trays attached 200  
61 Remove defective hard disk 201  
62 Disk full 201  
print is too light 249  
print quality test pages 245  
repeating defects 249  
skewed print 249  
solid color pages 250  
toner fog or background shading 251  
toner rubs off 251  
toner specks 251  
uneven print density 252  
print troubleshooting  
error reading USB drive 232  
finisher 243  
held jobs do not print 233  
incorrect characters print 234  
incorrect margins 247  
jammed page does not reprint 244  
job prints from wrong tray 234  
job prints on wrong paper 234  
job takes longer than expected 233  
jobs do not print 232  
storing 48  
unacceptable 44  
Universal Paper Size 132  
Universal size setting 41  
paper feed troubleshooting  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 243  
paper jams  
avoiding 106  
Paper Loading menu 130  
Paper Size/Type menu 126  
paper sizes  
supported by the printer 49  
Paper Texture menu 129  
paper type  
63 Unformatted disk 201  
80 Scheduled maintenance<x> 201  
82 Replace waste toner  
box 201, 205  
Large jobs do not collate 234  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 232  
82 Waste toner box missing 201  
82 Waste toner box nearly full 201  
84 <color> pc unit missing 201  
84 Black pc unit life warning 201  
84 color pc unit life warning 201  
84 Replace black pc unit 202, 214  
84 Replace color pc units 202, 214  
84 Unsupported <color> pc unit 202  
88 <color> toner low 202  
88 Replace <color> toner 202, 217  
900–999 Service <message> 202  
Answering 190  
custom 42  
paper types  
paper curl 248  
duplex support 50  
supported by finisher 50  
supported by printer 50  
where to load 50  
PCL Emul menu 170  
PDF menu 172  
photoconductors  
ordering 204  
paper frequently jams 243  
tray linking does not work 234  
unexpected page breaks occur 234  
printer  
configurations 17  
models 17  
moving 220  
Printer locked, enter PIN 194  
printer messages  
photos  
Bin <x> Full 190  
copying 56  
1565 Emul Error Load Emul  
Option 197  
Busy 190  
Calibrating 190  
Call complete 190  
Cancel not available 190  
Canceling 190  
port interface card 30  
PostScript menu 169  
Power Saver 194  
adjusting 225  
print job  
canceling from Mac OS 9 104  
200–289.yy paper jam 202  
289 Staple error <x> 202  
290-295.yy scanner jam 202  
31 Missing or defective <color>  
cartridge 197  
Change <src> to <x> 190  
Check <src> guides 190  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing job accounting  
statistics 190  
Close cover<x> 190  
Close door <x> 191  
Connect <x>bps 191  
Copies 191  
Remove paper from all bins 195  
Remove paper from bin<x> 195  
Remove paper from standard  
bin 195  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 195  
network setup page 103  
print quality test pages 103  
statement paper 36  
printing confidential and other held jobs  
from Macintosh computer 100  
from Windows 100  
Defragmenting Flash 191  
Delete 191  
Delete all 191  
Delete all confidential jobs 191  
Deleting 191  
Dialing 191  
Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 191  
Disk recovery x/y XX% 191  
Empty hole punch box 191  
Encrypting disk x/y XX% 191  
Enter PIN 192  
Resetting the printer 195  
Restore Held Jobs? 195  
Restoring Factory Defaults 196  
Restoring Held Jobs(s) x/y 196  
Scan Document Too Long 196  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 196  
Sending page <n> 196  
Serial <x> 196  
profile  
creating an e-mail 70  
emailing to 70  
Programming disk 194  
Programming flash 194  
Programming System Code 194  
Q
Set clock 196  
Some held jobs will not be  
restored 196  
Quality menu 164  
Queued for sending 194  
R
Enter PIN to lock 192  
Error reading USB drive 192  
Fax failed 192  
Standard Bin Full 196  
Staples <x> empty or misfed 196  
Staples <x> low or missing 196  
Submitting Selection 197  
System busy, preparing resources for  
job. 197  
System busy, preparing resources for  
job. Deleting held job(s). 197  
Tray <x> Empty 197  
Tray <x> Low 197  
Tray <x> Missing 197  
USB/USB <x> 197  
Waiting 197  
Waiting for redial 197  
printer options troubleshooting  
drawers 242  
Reading USB drive 194  
Ready 195  
Flushing buffer 192  
Receive complete 195  
Receiving page <n> 195  
recycled paper  
using 44  
recycling  
Lexmark products 220  
WEEE statement 260  
reducing a copy 59  
Remote Management Active 195  
Remove paper from all bins 195  
Remove paper from bin<x> 195  
Remove paper from standard bin 195  
Repeat print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
Formatting Disk x/y XX% 192  
Formatting Flash 192  
Held jobs were not restored 196  
Incorrect orientation 192  
Insert hole punch box 192  
Insert Tray <x> 192  
Internal System Error, Reload  
Bookmarks 192  
Internal System Error, Reload Security  
Certificates 192  
Invalid Engine Code 192  
Invalid file format 193  
Invalid Network Code 193  
Invalid PIN 193  
finisher 242  
flash memory card 242  
hard disk with adapter 242  
internal print server 243  
memory card 243  
Job stored for delayed  
transmission 193  
Line busy 193  
printing from Windows 100  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 195  
Load <src> with <x> 193  
Load manual feeder with <x> 193  
Load staples 193  
Menus are disabled 193  
Network 193  
option not working 241  
USB/parallel interface card 243  
printer, moving  
disassembling printer from scanner  
shelf 221  
Reports menu 134  
Reserve print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
Resetting the printer 195  
resolution, fax  
Network <x> 193  
No answer 194  
setting the printer up in a new  
location 223  
No dial tone 194  
No held jobs 194  
No jobs to cancel 194  
No recognized file types 194  
Power Saver 194  
shipping to another location 224  
to another location within the  
office 221  
printhead lenses  
cleaning 210  
changing 86  
Restore Held Jobs? 195  
Restoring Factory Defaults 196  
Restoring Held Jobs(s) x/y 196  
RJ11 adapter, using 75  
Printer locked, enter PIN 194  
Printing 194  
Printing 194  
printing  
A5 paper 36  
black and white 105  
directory list 103  
from Macintosh 99  
from USB flash memory device 101  
from Windows 99  
installing printer software 99  
max speed and max yield 105  
menu settings page 103, 203  
S
Programming disk 194  
Programming flash 194  
Programming System Code 194  
Queued for sending 194  
Reading USB drive 194  
Ready 195  
Receive complete 195  
Receiving page <n> 195  
Remote Management Active 195  
safety  
information 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 0, 0  
, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 16, 16,  
16, 16, 16, 16, 16  
Scan Document Too Long 196  
scan quality, improving 98  
Scan to USB Settings menu 158  
scan troubleshooting  
cannot scan from a computer 238  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
partial document or photo scans 238  
scan was not successful 237  
scanner unit does not close 235  
scanning takes too long or freezes the  
computer 237  
Standard Network menu 184  
standard tray  
loading 34  
Standard USB menu 186  
staple cartridges  
ordering 204  
Door A 231  
FAQ about color printing 252  
troubleshooting, copy  
copier does not respond 235  
partial document or photo  
copies 236  
scanner  
Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) 18  
functions 17  
Staples <x> empty or misfed 196  
Staples <x> low or missing 196  
status of supplies, checking 203  
storing  
paper 48  
supplies 203  
subject and message information  
adding to e-mail 70  
Submitting Selection 197  
Substitute Size menu 129  
supplies  
poor copy quality 235  
poor scanned image quality 237  
scanner unit does not close 235  
troubleshooting, display  
display is blank 232  
display shows only diamonds 232  
troubleshooting, fax  
blocking junk faxes 241  
caller ID is not shown 238  
can receive but not send faxes 240  
can send but not receive faxes 240  
cannot send or receive a fax 238  
received fax has poor print  
quality 240  
scanner glass 18  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 196  
scanner connectors 32  
scanner glass  
cleaning 220  
scanner glass (flatbed)  
copying using 56  
scanning to a computer 95  
improving scan quality 98  
scanning to a USB flash memory  
device 96  
conserving 204  
status of 203  
storing 203  
scanning to an FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the  
computer 92  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 93  
improving FTP quality 94  
using shortcut numbers 92  
using the address book 92  
using the keypad 91  
Secure mode 229  
Supplies menu 125  
supplies, ordering  
troubleshooting, paper feed  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 243  
troubleshooting, print  
error reading USB drive 232  
finisher 243  
held jobs do not print 233  
incorrect characters print 234  
incorrect margins 247  
jammed page does not reprint 244  
job prints from wrong tray 234  
job prints on wrong paper 234  
job takes longer than expected 233  
jobs do not print 232  
photoconductors 204  
staple cartridges 204  
toner cartridges 204  
waste toner box 205  
system board  
accessing 27  
reinstalling 31  
System busy, preparing resources for  
job. 197  
System busy, preparing resources for  
job. Deleting held job(s). 197  
security  
Embedded Web Server 229  
locking control panel menus 227  
locking entire printer 227  
modifying confidential print  
settings 227  
supporting IPSec 228  
supporting SNMPv3 228  
using 802.1x authentication 228  
Security menu 175  
T
Large jobs do not collate 234  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 232  
TCP/IP menu 180  
telecommunication  
notices 260, 261, 262  
toner cartridges  
ordering 204  
paper curl 248  
paper frequently jams 243  
tray linking does not work 234  
unexpected page breaks occur 234  
troubleshooting, print quality  
blank pages 245  
Sending page <n> 196  
Serial <x> 196  
Set clock 196  
replacing 217  
touch screen  
buttons 22  
Set Date and TIme menu 179  
setting  
transparencies  
guidelines 46  
characters have jagged edges 246  
clipped images 246  
paper size 34  
loading 38  
dark lines 246  
paper type 34  
making 56  
gray background 246  
TCP/IP address 180  
Universal Paper Size 41  
Settings menu 136  
Tray <x> Empty 197  
Tray <x> Low 197  
Tray <x> Missing 197  
tray linking 42  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line 247  
poor transparency quality 252  
print irregularities 248  
Setup menu 167  
shipping to another location  
printer, scanner, and shelf 224  
shortcuts, creating  
tray unlinking 42  
trays  
linking 41, 42  
unlinking 41, 42  
troubleshooting  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 231  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 237  
print is too dark 250  
print is too light 249  
print quality test pages 245  
repeating defects 249  
skewed print 249  
solid color pages 250  
toner fog or background shading 251  
toner rubs off 251  
e-mail 68  
fax destination 84, 85  
FTP destination 92, 93  
SNMPv3 228  
Some held jobs will not be  
restored 196  
toner specks 251  
Standard Bin Full 196  
contacting Customer Support 255  
uneven print density 252  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
troubleshooting, printer options  
drawers 242  
finisher 242  
flash memory card 242  
hard disk with adapter 242  
internal print server 243  
memory card 243  
option not working 241  
USB/parallel interface card 243  
troubleshooting, scan  
cannot scan from a computer 238  
partial document or photo scans 238  
scan was not successful 237  
scanner unit does not close 235  
scanning takes too long or freezes the  
computer 237  
U
Universal Paper Size 132  
setting 41  
Universal Setup menu 132  
unlinking trays 41  
unlocking  
control panel menus 225  
USB flash memory device 101  
USB port 32  
USB/USB <x> 197  
using RJ11 adapter 75  
Utilities menu 166  
V
Verify print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
W
Waiting 197  
Waiting for redial 197  
waste toner box  
ordering 205  
replacing 205  
weight precautions, moving the printer  
printer weight 220  
scanner weight 220  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krown Manufacturing Printer 2000STD User Manual
KVH Industries Satellite TV System TracVision G4 User Manual
Laser Handheld TV DVBT MP32 User Manual
Lenovo Computer Hardware 3000 C200 User Manual
Lexmark All in One Printer E234 User Manual
LG Electronics Washer WM3431H WM3434H User Manual
Linear Smoke Alarm DXS 72 User Manual
Maytag Water Heater HE2930T User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower M55H53RD User Manual
McCulloch Pressure Washer 6096160G04 User Manual